Home

T-Mobile Samsung Galaxy Exhibit 4GB 4G Grey

1. 106 Display Options 0 107 Adding more Contacts via Accounts and Syne 2 n t0nie Ayichies seeedavegne Da pam ane 108 Additional Contact Options 109 GMOUPS d2 2hvtdenideartanadene etwas 111 The Favorites Tab 113 Section 7 Messages ssssssssessscsssseeees 114 Types of Messages 000005 114 Creating and Sending Messages 115 Media Hub 2 20005 158 Message Options 0 116 Play Movies amp TV 00000005 160 Viewing Newly Received Messages 119 Play Music 000000 eae 161 Deleting Messages 121 Music Player 00005 167 Message Search 005 122 Using Playlists 000005 169 Messaging Settings 123 Creating a Playlist 169 Assigning Messages as Spam 126 Transferring Music Files 171 Accessing Your Spam Folder 128 Removing Music Files 171 Text Templates 00000000 128 MUSIC HUD hint cae endetieiodaiaettions 171 Email iii tcinadeearneeSdeaw de vada onde 129 T Mobile TV 0 00 cece eee 173 Microsoft Exchange Email Outlook 133 YOUTUDG 225 o a0 c teade tE SEDER 173 Using Google Mail 000005 139 Section 9 Applications and Google Talk eee eee eee ees 141 Development
2. 189 Music Hub 00000000 190 Music Player 0000000 190 My FileS 354 08 sade ta ates 190 Navigation 0000 000s 191 PHONG ranc asmenine sa eee nn le 193 Play BOOKS 000eeeeeee eee 194 Play Magazines 00005 194 Play Movies amp TV 0000005 195 Play Music 00 0 cece cece eee 195 Play Store 2 0 0 eee 195 Downloading a New Google Application 196 Launching an Installed Google Application 197 Android Development 197 SVOICC Rt ie a EE A AERA eh eels Gre 198 Samsung AppS 22 2 0000 199 SCOUL ac ates aah yest cee aerials 199 Settings ororen irrena koana eai 200 Slacker Radio n nnan naana 200 T Mobile My Account 200 T Mobile Name ID 00005 201 T Mobile TV ananuna 201 FAK EPEE N A EA IAA 201 Video Player 2 2 000005 202 Visual Voicemail 000000s 202 Voice Recorder 0 c ce nnan 202 Voice Search 0 cece eee eee 203 VPN Client 3 4 ainean aao Aira 203 YouTube 00 eee eee eee eee 204 Section 10 Connections s 206 WED js icusccne nats deans dang egos sanau es 206 Bluetooth 222 2 00s 214 Enable Downloading for Web Applications 218 PC Connections 2 218 Kias AIF siros resets 219 WI FI acacia arnip nen a OnE E EEEE 221 USB Tethering 0 000000ce
3. 3 If prompted tap Disable Wi Fi if you currently have an active Wi Fi connection 173 4 Tap Start Trial to begin a free 30 day trial of the service Tap Continue to keep viewing the free content or Purchase Options to buy the paid features 5 Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing Live TV TV shows Favorites On Demand More Info Browse or Live Channels YouTube YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share videos and view them in MPEG 4 format 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt YouTube a 2 When the screen loads you can begin searching and viewing posted videos 3 Press l gt Settings gt General gt High quality on mobile if you prefer high quality output Section 9 Applications and Development This section contains a description of each application that is available in the Applications Menu its function and how to navigate through that particular application If the application is already described in another section of this user manual then a cross reference to that particular section is provided Note This manual only addresses applications that have been loaded on your device computer tablet as of the date of purchase Information concerning third party applications that you may choose to download from the Google Play Store or otherwise should be obtained from the application provider directly Tip To open applications quickly add the icons
4. Compose 2 Tap the Enter recipient field to manually enter a recipient or 3 Tap 2 to select from one of the following e Groups to select a recipient from the Group list e Favorites to select a recipient from the Favorites list e Contacts to select a recipient from your Contacts list valid entries must have a wireless phone number or email address e Logs to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages 4 If adding a recipient from either Logs Contacts or Group tap the contact to place a checkmark then tap Done The contact displays in the recipient field Note Delete any unnecessary members by tapping their name number in the recipient area and selecting Delete 115 Add more recipients by tapping either the Enter recipient field or Fa and selecting recipients Tap the Enter message field and use the on screen keypad to enter a message For more information refer to Text Input Methods on page 78 Review your message and tap EZA Send If you have more than one recipient the same text message is sent to all recipients in the Enter Recipients field Note If you exit a message before you send it it will be automatically saved as a draft Quick Messaging a Number from the Contacts List 1 2 3 Quick Texting From the Home screen tap Contacts Locate an entry from the Contacts list In a single motion touch and slide your finger over the nu
5. Section 7 Messages This section describes how to send or receive different types of messages It also explains the features and functionality associated with messaging Types of Messages Your phone provides the following message types Text Messages Multimedia Picture Video and Audio Messages Email and Gmail Messages Google Google Talk Messenger The Short Message Service SMS lets you send and receive text messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses To use this feature you may need to subscribe to your service provider s message service The Multimedia Messaging Service MMS lets you send and receive multimedia messages such as picture video and audio messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses To use this feature you may need to subscribe to your service provider s multimedia message service Message Icons on the Status Bar Icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display when new messages are received For more information refer to Status Bar on page 30 Important During the creation of a text message adding an image sound file or video clip automatically changes it from a text message SMS to a multimedia message MMS Note The Messaging application can also be accessed by pressing and then tapping Et Apps gt Messaging Messages 114 Creating and Sending Messages 1 From the Home screen tap P Messaging gt
6. Read the on screen notification regarding data use and tap OK If necessary tap the Mobile HotSpot field to access the main application From the First time HotSpot configuration screen tap the Network SSID field and then create a new Network SSID name Verify the Security field is set to WPA2 PSK Enter a new password then write it down Tap Save to store the new settings Confirm the Mobile AP service icon A appears at the top of the screen By default the connection is open and not secured It is recommended that you access the Mobile HotSpot settings and create a secure connection by using a password for communication Note Using your Mobile HotSpot drains your device s battery much faster The best way to keep using the device as a HotSpot is by connecting to a Charger To connect to the HotSpot 1 Enable Wi Fi wireless functionality on your target device laptop media device etc 2 Scan for Wi Fi networks from the external device and select your device s Mobile HotSpot name from the network list e The SSID name for your device s HotSpot is determined by what you entered into the Network SSID field e You can change the name by tapping Configure gt Network SSID and changing the entry 3 Select this HotSpot and follow your on screen instructions to complete the connection 4 Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet connection To secure the Portable HotSpot service The two m
7. e Copy to dialing screen press l to pass the current number to your dialer and then edit the selected number before you place your next outbound call e Delete press l to delete the Contacts entry e Send number press l to send the current Contacts entry information to an external recipient Call Functions and Contacts List 76 Add to reject list press l to add the current phone number to an automatic rejection list Similar to a block list the selected caller will be blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone Touch and hold an entry to display the entry specific context menu e Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list Erasing the Call Log List You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current entries from the Call log list To clear a single entry from the list 1 From the Home screen tap Ri gt Ka 2 Touch and hold an entry and select Delete gt Delete To clear all entries from the list 1 From the Home screen tap gt amp i 2 Press and then tap Delete 3 Tap Select all gt Delete gt Delete 77 Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen When you are unable to answer a call for any reason and your screen is locked the number of missed calls are displayed on the Lock screen immediately after a call is missed 1 Press a Power End to reactivate the screen 2 Touch and drag the button with the number of missed calls on it anywhere on the screen The Logs tab
8. so you can take videos of yourself or video chat Flash allows you to set the flash options to Off or On When you set the flash to On it stays on continually while you are taking a video Recording mode allows you to set the recording mode e Normal is limited only by available space on the destination location e Limit for MMS is limited by MMS size restrictions Effects allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the video Options include No effect Black and white Sepia and Negative Exposure value allows you to adjust the brightness level by moving the slider Timer allows you to set a timer for how long to wait before taking a video Options include Off 2 sec 5 sec and 10 sec Multimedia 154 155 Settings continued Resolution allows you to set the image size to either 1280x720 720x480 640x480 or 320x240 White balance allows you to setthis option to one of the following choices Auto Daylight Cloudy Incandescent or Fluorescent Guidelines allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off Video quality allows you to set the image quality to Superfine Fine or Normal Storage allows you to configure the default storage location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory card if inserted Reset allows you to reset all camera or camcorder settings to the default values Image viewer allows you to access the Image viewer and the various viewing options fo
9. 4 Tap the current entry then tap the new target speed dial location Note Tapping 2 existing speed dial locations causes the entries to switch positions 5 Tap Done to apply your change and return to the previous screen Call Functions and Contacts List 64 Removing a Speed Dial Entry 1 From the Home screen tap A 2 Press B and then tap Speed dial setting 3 Touch and hold a existing on screen speed dial location and select Remove from the context menu or Press l and then tap Remove Tap an entry and select Bq Remove entry Select either Done to complete the deletion or Cancel to exit 4 Press S to return to the previous screen Making a Call Using Speed Dial You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the Contacts List for speed dialing 1 From the Home screen tap N 2 Touch and hold a previously created speed dial location numbers 2 100 or 1 if you are dialing voice mail until the number begins to dial 3 If you are not certain of the speed dial location tap A gt l gt Speed dial setting and tap a speed dial number to view the assigned phone number 65 Using S Voice This is a voice recognition application used to activate a wide variety of functions on your device This is a natural language recognition application This goes beyond the Google Search Voice Actions feature that simply recognizes Google commands and search terms You can ask it questions Is it raining in Dal
10. Tap Done to store the new image Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper 1 From the Home screen tap cEEE Apps gt KH Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a file to open it 3 With the image displayed press amp and then tap Set as 4 Select one of the these options e Home screen assigns the current image to the home screen background This image is spread across all available screens e Lock screen assigns the selected image to the background for the lock screen e Home and lock screens assigns the current image to both the Home screen and Lock screens Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out to create a cropped area Tap Done to assign the wallpaper image Tap Cancel to stop without updating the wallpaper image Multimedia 152 Using the Camcorder In addition to taking photos the camera also doubles as a camcorder that also allows you to record view and send high definition videos Shooting Video Tip When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions it is recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by having the light source behind you 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Camera g 2 Tap and slide the Camera mode button down to Camcorder Mode 3 Using the device s main display screen as a viewfinder adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject Note U
11. This device can be used for Android application development You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this device then run the applications using the hardware system and network Warning Because the device can be configured with system software not provided by or supported by Google or any other company end users operate these devices at their own risk Unknown sources This feature can be used for Android application development The feature allows developers to install non Play Store applications m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Security gt Unknown sources Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is active Note If Unknown sources is disabled those applications without a certificate will not be allowed to download to your device Manage applications This feature allows you to manage and remove installed applications You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications on your device and Clear the data cache or defaults m From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Application manager Clearing application cache and data 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Application manager 2 Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data 3 Tap Force stop Uninstall Clear data Clear cache or Clear defaults Uninstalling third party applications
12. Your device lets you use a microSD SD or microSDHC card also referred to as a memory card to expand available memory space This secure digital card enables you to exchange images music and data between SD compatible devices This section addresses the features and options of your device s SD functionality The device has a USB SD card mode microSD card storage up to 2GB in size SDHC card storage up to 32GB in size Using the SD Card There are several methods for using the SD card 1 Connecting to your PC to store files such as music videos or other types of files and media 2 To activate the camera video music player and other dependant media or applications Note This device supports up to a 32GB microSDHC memory card SD card Overview After mounting an SD card in the device you can use your computer to access and manage the SD card Important If access to the external SD card is not available download and install the USB drivers microSD Icon Indicators The following icons show your microSD card connection status at a glance the card can now safely be removed T the card is being prepared for use and for Fos mounting A the card has been improperly removed Memory Card 52 Important DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is accessing or transferring files Doing so will result in loss or damage of data Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD
13. accounts such as Phone SIM Google or Corporate Your device automatically sorts the Contacts entries alphabetically You can create either a Phone SIM Google Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Samsung account contact Note Before you can save a contact to the Phone Contact settings must be set to Save new contacts to Phone Important The Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account types are only visible after creating an email account of those types on your phone Contacts 92 Phone contacts are stored locally on the device Note If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters contacts stored on the phone can be lost SIM contacts are stored within the SIM Card Note SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an entry Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync also known as Work or Outlook contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft Outlook Add new account lets you create a new account type Choose from Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Samsung account or Google Note When storing an entry into your SIM card note that only the Name and Number are saved To save additional information for a particular contact such as notes email dates etc it is important to save that Contact into your phone s on board memory 93 1 From the Home screen tap T Contacts 2 Tap to create a contact Note
14. and playback songs purchased from the Play Store The music you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and instantly ready to play or download m Access the new music tab from within your Play Store application The Music application contains a music player that plays music and other audio files that you copy from your computer 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt ww Play Music a The Music app searches both your online library and your device s internal storage for music and playlists this can take from a few seconds to several minutes depending on the amount of new music added since you last opened the application It then displays a carousel view of your new and recent music organized by album 2 If prompted follow the on screen instructions to link your current account to Google Play Music 161 Tap an on screen account to add it or select Add account to use a new account Atthe free songs screen select either Get free songs or Skip e Get free songs are downloaded via either the Internet or Play Store e Follow the on screen download and installation instructions Swipe left or right to browse through your new and available music Music albums and artists are grouped into categories Tap an on screen album to open it and begin playback Return to the Library screen from most other screens in the Music application by tapping the Music application icon Music notification
15. gt Network mode 2 Tap WCDMA only A check mark displays next to this option to indicate that it is active Network Operators Using this feature you can view the current network connection You can also scan and select a network operator manually or set the network selection to Automatic 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks 2 Tap Network operators The current network connection displays at the bottom of the list Important You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an available network 3 Tap Search now to manually search for a network 4 Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network connection Note Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time Changing Your Settings 236 Default Setup Options Your phone default is set to Automatic to automatically search for an available network You can set this option to Manual to select a network each time you connect 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks gt Network operators 2 Tap Default setup Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a network or Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually 237 USB Tethering and Mobile HotSpot This option allows you to share your phone s mobile data connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and computer A wireless v
16. gt Language and input gt Fey adjacent to the Samsung keyboard field or From within an active text entry screen touch and hold Input Methods and select Settings then tap Fe to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen In a single motion touch and slide the Predictive text slider to the right to turn it on ON Tap the Predictive text field and configure any of the following advanced options e Personalized data activate this feature to use the personal language data that you have entered and selected to make your text entry prediction results better By enabling this feature you can choose from the following personalization features e Learn from Gmail allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account and add used text to your personal dictionary e Learn from Facebook allows you to log into your current Facebook account and add used text to your personal dictionary e Learn from Twitter allows you to sign into your existing Twitter account and add used text to your personal dictionary e Learn from Messaging allows your device to learn your messaging style by using your Messaging information e Learn from Contacts updates predictive style by learning your Contacts style e Clear personalized data removes all personalized data entered by the user Press 5 to return to the previous screen Changing Your Settings 270 Configure Google Voice Typing 1 From the Home screen press I and then tap Settings
17. recipient For more information refer to Creating a Contact on page 92 1 From the Home screen tap J 2 Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on screen context menu 3 Tap Share namecard via gt Bluetooth Important You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature 4 Tap the Bluetooth device in which to send this name card Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient 105 Copying Contact Information Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts list is your device s built in memory This procedure allows you to copy numbers saved to the phone s memory onto the SIM card 1 From the Home screen tap Fy 2 From the Contacts List press and then tap Import Export gt Export to SIM card 3 Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact entries or Select a specific entry by touching an entry A check mark indicates a selection 4 Tap Done The name and phone number for the selected contact is then copied to the SIM Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the phone s memory onto the SIM card 1 From the Home screen tap A 2 From the Contacts List press l and then tap Import Export gt Export to SD card 3 Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries Synchronizing Contacts Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and manage
18. the Play Store displays the information the application will access Tap OK if you agree to the conditions of the application Once you tap OK on this screen you are responsible for using this application on the device and the amount of data it uses Use this feature with caution Tap Install gt Accept amp download Note Use caution with applications which request access to any personal data functions or significant amounts of data usage times If prompted follow the on screen instructions to pay for the application Check the progress of the current download by opening the Notifications panel The content download icon appears in the notification area of the status bar Applications and Development 196 7 On the main Play Store screen press l and then tap My Apps tap an installed application in the list and then tap Open Tip The newly downloaded applications display in the applications list and are shown in alphabetical order if the View Type is set to Alphabetical grid or Alphabetical list or at the end of the list if View type is set to Customizable grid Note A data plan is required to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details Launching an Installed Google Application 1 From the Home screen tap Apps 2 Tap the newly installed application This application is typically located on the last Applications page 197 Android Development
19. you verify this location or change it before initiating the use of the camera or camcorder features me LLL Apps gt Elebi mm mi 1 From the Home screen tap Camera 2 From the viewfinder screen tap Ed scroll down to the Storage entry 3 Tap this entry and select the desired default storage location for newly taken pictures or videos Choose from Phone or Memory card Settings and Note It is recommended that you set the option to Memory card 4 Press to return to the Home screen Multimedia 144 Using the Camera Taking Photos Taking pictures with your device s built in camera is as simple as choosing a subject pointing the camera then pressing the camera key Note When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions shadows may appear on the photo 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Camera 2 Using the device s main display screen as a viewfinder adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject Note Use the Up and Down volume keys to zoom in or out 3 If desired before taking the photo use the left area of the screen to access various camera options and settings 4 You can also tap the screen to move the focus to a desired area of interest 145 5 Press Camera key until the shutter sounds The picture is automatically stored within your designated storage location page 144 If no microSD is installed all pictures are store
20. 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap the Visibility field shown by the device name Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an external device This is shown by a green check mark 3 Tap Scan Your device displays a list of discovered in range Bluetooth devices 4 Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing 5 Enter the passkey or PIN code if needed and tap OK 6 The external device must accept the connection and enter your device s PIN code Once successfully paired to an external device displays in the Status area Note Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth compatible devices display and operations may be different and functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth compatible devices Important If callers can not hear you during a call while using a paired Bluetooth headset with built in microphone verify the Call audio option is enabled within the entry s Bluetooth Settings page Connections 216 Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between the device and your phone but retains the knowledge of the pairing At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device there is no need to setup the connection information again 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap the previously paired device from the bottom of the page 3 Tap OK to con
21. 252 Font Size Caption 204 Changing 279 Minimum Setting 212 Forgot Pattern 260 G Gallery Folder Options 150 Opening 157 Games Volume 250 Gestures Overview 41 Shake to Update 41 Getting Started 7 Battery 11 Battery Cover 8 Locking Unlocking the Device 19 microSD card 12 SIM Card 9 Switching Device On Off 18 325 Voice Mail 22 Gmail 139 183 Composing a message 140 Creating an Additional Account 141 Opening 139 Other Options 139 Personalize Swype 81 268 Predictive Text 89 270 Refreshing 139 Signing In 139 Viewing 140 Google Create New Account 19 Merge Contacts 99 Retrieving Password 20 Set Search Engine 213 Signing into Your Account 20 Voice Typing 78 Google Books 194 Google Mail see also Gmail 140 Google Maps Enabling a location source 185 Opening a map 186 Google Music 161 195 Google Now 203 Google Places See also Local 184 Google Search 25 183 Google Talk 201 Google Voice Typing Configuring 91 271 Using 91 GPS amp AGPS 295 GPS Tag 147 GPU Force Rendering 280 Groups Adding an Member to an Existing Group 111 Creating a new caller group 111 Deleting 112 Deleting a Caller Group 112 Editing a Caller Group 112 Removing an Entry 111 Settings 112 GSM 235 H Health and Safety Information 283 Hearing Aids 242 Hidden Applictions Show 39 Hold Placing a call on hold 71 Home 36 Home City Setting 261 Home Key 36 Home Screen Assigning a New 45 Changing Wallpaper 50 Menu Sett
22. A light touch works best e Flick Move your finger in lighter quicker strokes than swiping This finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion such as when flicking through contacts or a message list Swipe or slide Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally across the screen This allows you to move the area of focus or to scroll through a list For example slide your finger left or right on the Home screen to scroll among the seven panels Drag Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to move it Do not release your finger until you have reached the target position e Rotate Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to landscape by turning the device sideways For example rotate to landscape orientation when entering text to provide a larger keyboard or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling e Pinch Pinch the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom out when viewing a picture or a Web page Move fingers inward to zoom out Spread Spread the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom in when viewing a picture or a Web page Move fingers outward to zoom in Understanding Your Device 40 Note These screens can be re arranged in any desired order For more information refer to Customizing the Screens on page 44 Motion Navigation and Activation The device comes equipped with the ability to assign specific functions to
23. Airplane mode icon is displayed at the top of your screen Mobile networks Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable the Mobile networks options m From the Home screen press amp and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks The following options display Use mobile data Allows you to activate mobile data usage on your device m From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks gt Mobile data Changing Your Settings 234 Data Roaming Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider s partner networks and access data services when you are out of your service providers area of coverage 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks gt Mobile data 2 Tap Data roaming to connect to data services while roaming outside your network or Tap Data roaming again to remove the green check mark and deactivate the feature Access Point Names To access a wireless access point m From the Home screen press I and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks gt Access Point Names A list of the Access point names display The active access point displays a bright green filled circle to the right of the name 235 Network mode You can configure your phone to either manually detect and use either a 2G GSM or 3G 4G WCD
24. From an active Web page press l and then tap Settings gt Privacy and security Clear all cookie data 2 Tap OK to delete the cookies or tap Cancel to exit Connections 210 Using Web History The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed websites These entries can be used to return to previously unmarked web pages 1 From the Home webpage tap gt History tab 2 Select a visited range category Choose from Today Yesterday or Most visited 3 Tap an entry to display the webpage or Press l and then tap Clear history to delete the current History list Using Most Visited The Most visited list provides you with a list of the most visited and bookmarked websites These entries are used to return to previously unmarked web pages 1 2 211 From the Home webpage tap gt History gt Most visited tab A list of your most frequently visited webpages displays The most frequently visited web pages display at the top of the list Tap any entry to display the selected webpage Browser Settings To configure browser settings 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt g Internet aes Press l and then tap Settings Choose an option from the following categories General e Set home page Sets the current home page for the Web browser e Form auto fill Allows you to fill in Web forms with a single tap e Auto fill text Allows you to set the text used for the Web form auto fi
25. Google Search Provides an on screen Internet search engine powered by Google To launch Google Search 1 Press and hold Home and then tap Google Search Rane sane falta From the Home screen tap Apps gt Google and enter the search text Tap on the Google Search bar and say the search information Follow the on screen instructions to review the available information Use the on screen search engine to search for your desired term Section 2 Understanding Your Device This section outlines key features of your device It also describes the device s keys screen and the icons that display when the device is in use Features of Your Device Your device is lightweight easy to use and offers many significant features The following list outlines a few of the features included in your device Touch screen with virtual on screen QWERTY keyboard High Speed Packet Access Plus HSPA delivering data speeds faster than the current 3G network technology Android v 4 1 2 Jelly Bean Platform Wi Fi Capability USB Tethering capable Bluetooth enabled Full Integration of Google Mobile Services Gmail YouTube Google Maps Google Voice Search Multiple Messaging Options Text Picture Video Messaging and Google Talk Corporate and Personal Email 5 Megapixel Camera and Camcorder with autofocus and digital Zoom VGA Front Facing camera Music Player with
26. List Options 99 Contact Menus Options 100 Contacts Adding a Number to Existing 97 Adding a Pause or Wait 97 Adding Your Facebook Friends 108 Additional Options 109 Deleting 98 Display Options 107 110 Displaying Contacts by Name 110 Export List to microSD 219 273 First Name 110 Groups 111 Last Name First 110 Merge with Google 99 Merge with Samsung Account 99 Reject List 100 Sending All 104 Setting Default Location 99 Settings 110 Share Namecard Via 100 Sharing Settings 110 Sharing Sending 104 322 Contacts List 56 Context Menus 97 100 Navigation 43 Using 43 Cookies Emptying 210 Copying Contact 105 CPU Usage Display 280 Create Folder Group Apps 39 Creating a Playlist 169 Creating and sending Messages 115 Customizable Grid 45 Customizing Home screens 44 D Data Auto Sync Data 233 Restrict Background Data 233 Data Limit Setting 233 323 Data Roaming 235 Activate Deactivate 233 235 Data Usage Cycle 233 Limiting 233 Date Selecting Format 277 Date and Time 277 Default Notifications Settings 250 Default Storage Assigning 144 Camcorder 21 144 155 Camera 21 144 Camera Storage 148 Deleting Multiple Messages 121 Single Bubble 122 Single Message 121 Deleting a contact 98 Desk Clock 179 Configuring 181 Desktop Backup Password 281 Device Reset 274 Device Options Screen 249 Display Icons 30 Settings 29 Status Bar 30 Display Touch Screen 295 Displaying your phone number 56 Do c
27. Manager This device can be used for Android development You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this device then run the applications using the hardware system and network This feature allows you to configure the device for development Warning Because the device can be configured with system software not provided by or supported by Google or any other company end users operate these devices at their own risk This menu allows you to manage installed applications You can view and control currently running services or use the device for application development You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data cache or defaults From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Application manager gt ALL Clearing Application Cache and Data Important You must have downloaded applications installed to use this feature 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Application manager 2 Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data 3 Tap Force stop Uninstall Clear data Clear cache or Clear defaults Uninstalling Third party Applications Important You must have downloaded applications installed to use this feature 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Application manager 2 Tap the DOWNLOADED tab and select your des
28. New Account 158 Using 159 Memo Options 188 Memory card Erasing files from the 54 Merge Calls 73 Merge with Google 99 Message Options 116 Read 119 Register a Number as Spam 120 Reply 120 Thread Options 120 Threads 120 Message Search 122 Message threads 120 Messaging Adding a Signature 125 Adding Attachments 118 Additional Text 119 Block Unknown Senders 125 127 Composing Options 117 Creating and sending 115 Creating and Sending Text Messages 115 Deleting a message 121 Draft 116 Google Mail 139 Icons on the Status Bar 114 Insert Smiley 117 Locked 116 117 Menu Options 116 Options 116 Settings 123 Signing into Google Mail 139 Spam 117 Text Templates 128 Types of Messages 114 Viewing new 119 micro SIM Card Changing Exisitng PIN 264 Lock 264 Setting Up Lock 264 microSD Card Insertion 12 Removal 13 Microsoft Exchange 93 129 Missed Call Viewing from Lock Screen 77 Mobile Data Activate Deactivate 233 Set Data Limit 233 Usage 234 Mobile HotSpot 224 225 Activating 225 Connecting 226 Securing 226 Mobile HotSpots Detect and Connect 234 Mobile Networks 234 Data Roaming 235 Mobile Data 234 Mobile Web 206 Entering Text in the Mobile Web Browser 207 Navigating with the Mobile Web 206 Using Bookmarks 209 MobileLife Widget 189 Installation 189 Mono Audio Setup 279 Motion On 276 Motion Settings 276 Mounting the SD card 53 Multi Party Call 73 Dropping One Participant 74 Private conversation 73 Multi party c
29. Note Selecting Close only closes the current description screen and does not disable data collection To disable data collection go to Settings gt Backup and reset gt Collect diagnostics and turn off the Allow Diagnostics feature Changing Your Settings 274 Add Account This menu allows you to set up manage and synchronize accounts including your Google and email accounts Adding an Account 1 From the Home screen press el and then tap Settings and then navigate to the Accounts area 2 Tap Add account and select one of the account types 3 Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your credentials and set up the account 4 Agreen circle will appear next to the account type once you have created an account Your email account will also be displayed in the Accounts section of the main Settings menu 275 Removing an Account Important Removing an account also deletes all of its messages contacts and other data from the device 1 From the Home screen press amp and then tap Settings and then navigate to the Accounts area 2 Tap the account name From the Accounts area of the screen tap the account entry 4 Tap Remove account then tap Remove account at the prompt to remove the account and delete all its messages contacts and other data Synchronizing a Accounts By default all managed accounts are synchronized You can also manually sync all current accounts 1 From the Home screen press l an
30. Screen Menu Settings on page 38 Back Key The Back key B returns you to the previously active screen If the on screen keyboard is currently open this key Closes the keyboard Home Screen The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications on your device There are initially seven available panels each populated with default shortcuts or applications You can customize each of these panels Signal strength Battery status Time Connection Status Status Bar Notification _ area Status Home Screen area Google search Shortcuts Primary Shortcuts Understanding Your Device 36 e Notification area displays those icons associated with end user notifications such as email messages calls missed call in progress new voicemail upcoming event USB connection emails and Text MMS messages These notifications appear at the top left of the screen within the Status bar area and display important user information This information can be accessed by either swiping down from the Status bar page 35 Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the device such as communication coverage Bluetooth 4G 3G Wi Fi communication battery levels GPS etc Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information about notifications and device status and allows access to application Widgets Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen width to provide
31. The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to receiving equipment The FCC can require you to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be eliminated Cautions Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly approved by Samsung could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment Only use approved batteries antennas and chargers The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said accessories Cause damage or a defect to the mobile device Although your mobile device is quite sturdy it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken Avoid dropping hitting bending or sitting on it Other Important Safety Information Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the mobile device in a vehicle Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your vehicle are securely mounted Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly When using a headset in dry environments static electricity can build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical shock To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry
32. Touch and hold an on screen key to enter the secondary symbol above the main one on the same key 5 Tap ra to choose from additional symbols For example TE Toenter tap ES gt and select the key Entering Text 84 Using the Samsung Keyboard This QWERTY keypad can be used to enter text in either a Portrait or landscape orientation The only difference between the two orientations are the sizes of the keys From a screen where you enter text rotate your phone counterclockwise to a landscape orientation The on screen QWERTY keypad displays The Samsung Keyboard This device has a built in QWERTY keypad portrait mode or keyboard landscape mode Using the QWERTY keypad keyboard you can type letter numbers punctuation and other characters To use the Samsung keypad you must first configure the settings to default to the Samsung keypad 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Default gt Samsung keyboard or From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select Es Choose input method gt Samsung keyboard 85 2 The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung keyboard configuration for all subsequent text input Shift key Text input field lt fig New message Hi there just got a new update and it 4 1 2 rock s Rockefeller Ricks docks Rocky ticks v Input Mod
33. UL Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label safety requirements Please adhere to the following safety Just go to instructions per UL guidelines http fun samsungmobileusa com recycling index jsp and FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY follow the instructions to print out a free pre paid postage LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE label and then send your old mobile device or battery to the address listed via U S Mail for recycling Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved PROPERTY DAMAGE IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE recycler INSTRUCTIONS To find the nearest recycling location go to our website DANGER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR www samsung com recyclingdirect ELECTRIC SHOCK CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE Or call 877 278 0799 INSTRUCTIONS Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH devices and batteries AMERICA USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE with local regulations In some areas the disposal of these POWER OUTLET items in household or business trash may be prohibited Help THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE us protect the environment recycle CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR _ HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION Warning Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode Health and Safety Informa
34. Unknown Senders 125 127 Manually Register a Number 125 126 Match Criteria 127 Register a Number 117 118 120 126 Register a Phrase 125 127 Registering a Phrase as Spam 127 Settings 125 126 Spam Messages 117 Assigning 117 Speakerphone Turning on and off 71 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information 288 Speed Dial Changing an entry 64 Making a call 65 Removing an entry 65 Setting up entries 64 Standard Limited Warranty 306 Status Bar 30 Sub Menus Navigation 42 Switching to a Bluetooth During a call 72 Swpe Connect Backup and Sync 80 268 SWYPE 123ABC Mode 83 Swype Cellular Data 80 268 Connect 80 268 Connect Registration 17 80 268 Contribute Usage Data 80 268 Entering Text 79 Personal Dictionary 81 268 Preferences 79 267 Reset Dictionary 80 267 Settings 79 267 Updates 81 268 System Volume 250 System Manager 17 274 System Tone Settings 251 T T9 Trace 89 269 see Swype 89 269 332 TeleNav see Scout 199 Tethering 237 Active Icon 224 Disconnecting 224 see USB Tethering 224 Text Adjusting Size 212 Minimum Font Size 212 Soom Amount on Double Tap 212 Text Input Methods 78 Text Input Method Selecting 78 Text Templates 117 128 Create Your Own 128 Text To Speech 272 Text to speech Configuration 272 Third Party Applications 254 Uninstalling 198 Time Zone Selecting 277 333 Timer Automatic Answering 242 244 Tington Assigning 242 Tools Camera 145 Touches S
35. Widgets Shortcuts Folders or Wallpapers For example one screen could contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms of media while another screen might contain communication apps such as Gmail You can customize your Home screen by doing the following Adding Deleting and Rearranging screens e Assigning a New Home screen Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts Adjusting the Home Screen Mode Sharing Application Information Managing Shortcuts Adding and Removing Widgets e Creating and Managing Folders Changing the Background Wallpapers Adding and Deleting Screens Your phone comes with seven screens You can delete these screens and then add them back later Note These screens can be deleted and re arranged Important Your device can only contain at most seven screens and at least one screen To delete a screen 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Edit page 2 Touch and hold then drag the undesired screen down to the Remove tab jjj 3 Press to return to the main Home screen To add a screen 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Edit page 2 Tap Add screen The newly added screen appears as the last page 3 Press to return to the main Home screen Understanding Your Device 44 Rearranging the Screens 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Edit page 2 Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new location Upper left is screen posi
36. You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the keypad and pressing I and then tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact Continue with step 3 3 Tap a destination type Phone SIM Google or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync depending on where you want to save the new contact information 4 Tap the Name field and enter a name for this contact using the displayed keypad Tap to access additional name entries such as Name prefix First name Middle name Last name and Name suffix 5 Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact Selections are Image Take picture or Tagged picture Note The label entries below can change and are dependant on the selected destination type ex the Other and Custom might not appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type 6 Tap the label button to the left of the Phone field and scroll through the list to select a category such as Mobile default Home Work Work Fax Home Fax Pager Other Custom or Callback Tapa phone number field and enter a phone number e Tap al on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered phone number e Tap to enter an additional phone number e Tap to remove a previously entered phone number Enter additional information such as Groups Ringtone Message alert or tap Vibration pattern to input additional category information e Add another field contains the following options Phonetic name Orga
37. You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed from the Play Store 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Application manager gt All 2 Tap the third party application and from the Application info screen tap Uninstall S Voice Launches your phone s built in voice recognition system that allows you to initiate several common tasks without having to touch the phone Features include Voice dial Text Navigate Memo Music Search and Driving mode m From the Home screen tap Apps gt Q S Voice For more information refer to Using S Voice on page 65 Applications and Development 198 Samsung Apps Allows you to easily download an abundance of applications to your device This includes games news reference social networking navigation and more Samsung Apps makes your Smartphone smarter Note Access to this feature requires that you already be logged in to your Samsung account application For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 21 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Samsung Apps i 2 If prompted read the on screen disclaimer and agree to the information 3 Follow the on screen instructions 199 Scout Allows you receive voice guided navigation using the power of Scout by Telenav your daily personal navigator The app provides personalized and up to date navigation on your device in your car or where
38. a new or existing contact from your online or remote accounts to your phone Prior to syncing you must first have an active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current Contact entries and be signed into your account via the phone With syncing any Contacts entries with phone numbers email addresses pictures etc are updated and synced with your device 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings and then navigate to the Accounts area 2 Select the email account containing the contacts you wish to synchronize 3 Tap Ks within the account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen 4 To synchronize only Contacts toggle the active state of the Sync Contacts field A green checkmark indicates the feature is enabled Contacts 106 Note The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes If after 10 20 minutes your list has not been updated repeat step 2 3 5 Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact information Note Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and Corporate accounts via the device 107 Display Options The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose which contacts to display You can also choose to display only contacts that have phone numbers Note Once a display filter has been selected only those Contact entries are shown until the All contacts option is re selected 1 From the Home screen tap 32
39. activates the feature A Tethering or HotSpot active notification briefly appears on the screen Look for the Tethering active icon A in the Status bar area of the screen Read the on screen notification regarding data use and tap OK To disconnect tethering 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Tethering and Mobile HotSpot Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the check mark and deactivate the feature Remove the USB cable from the device Connections 224 Mobile HotSpot This feature allows you to turn your device into a Wi Fi HotSpot The feature works best when used in conjunction with HSPA 4G data services although 3G service can also be used The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices Important The Mobile HotSpot service can not be active at the same time as Wi Fi Please close your Wi Fi connection prior to launching this service Note You must have a tethering plan on your account in order to use the Mobile HotSpot You cannot use data on the device while using Mobile HotSpot To activate the Mobile HotSpot service 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Tethering and Mobile HotSpot 225 pone Note In a single motion touch and slide the Mobile HotSpot slider to the right to turn it on ONS
40. allows you to configure the pointer speed for the mouse trackpad 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Pointer speed 2 Adjust the slider and tap OK Changing Your Settings 272 Back up and Reset Location settings backup configurations or reset the phone to erase all personal data m From the Home screen press Settings gt Backup and reset E and then tap Mobile Backup and Restore The device can be configured to back up your current settings application data and settings 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Backup and reset 2 Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current phone settings and applications 3 Tap Backup account to assign the account being backed up 4 Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re installation of a previously installed application including preferences and data 5 Tap Factory data reset to reset your device and sound settings to the factory default settings For more information refer to Factory Data Reset on page 274 273 6 Tap Collect diagnostics to collects diagnostic data for troubleshooting use For more information refer to Collect Diagnostics on page 274 Prior to doing a Factory Reset Before initiating a factory reset it is recommended that you backup your personal data prior to use To export a Contact list to your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Contacts 2 Pre
41. and potential hearing problem varies Additionally the amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound the device settings and the headphones that are used As a result there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of sound settings and equipment You should follow some common sense recommendations when using any portable audio device Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at which you can hear adequately Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing Health and Safety Information 298 When using headphones turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are listening to Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings If you choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment use noise cancelling headphones to block out background environmental noise By blocking background environment noise noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than when using earbuds Limit the amount of time you listen As the volume increases less time is required before you hearing could be affected Avoid using he
42. as pressing keys drawing characters on a touch screen with your fingers or playing games you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands neck shoulders or other parts of your body When using your device for extended periods hold the device with a relaxed grip press the keys lightly and take frequent breaks If you continue to have discomfort during or after such use stop use and see a physician If your device has a camera flash or light do not use the flash or light close to the eyes of people or pets 122011 Section 13 Warranty Information Standard Limited Warranty What is covered and for how long SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA LLC SAMSUNG warrants that SAMSUNG s handsets and accessories Products are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and continuing for the following specified period of time after that date Phone 1 Year Batteries 1 Year Case Pouch Holster 90 Days Other Phone Accessories 1 Year What is not covered This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product This Limited Warranty does not cover a defects or damage resulting from accident misuse abnormal use abnormal conditions improper storage exposure to liquid moisture dampness sand or dirt neglect or unusual physical electrical or electromechanical stress b scratch
43. be listed on a single screen 3 Select an email account and tap an email message Messages 130 Refreshing Email messages 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap ie gt Email Select an email account e f you are already in an email account tap the account name field upper right to open the complete email account list page Select an available email account AN Tap O Refresh Composing Email 1 2 131 From the Home screen tap gt Email Tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page Tap Inbox gt K Compose Enter the recipient s email address in the To field e If you are sending the email message to several recipients separate the email addresses with a comma You can add as many message recipients as you want Press l and then tap Add Cc Bcce to add additional carbon copy recipients e Use the Ce field to carbon copy additional recipients e Use the Bec field to blind copy additional recipients Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject 8 Tap the email text field and compose your email message e To add an attachment such as image video audio etc tap Attach from the top of the screen and make a category selection Tap the file you wish to attach Tap to delete the attached file Note If you attach an image to your email you have the option to resize it prior to delivery Choose from Or
44. be subject to the non exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction where you are a resident Notwithstanding the foregoing Samsung may apply for injunctive remedies or an equivalent type of urgent legal relief in any jurisdiction b United States residents ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with any other person s or entity s claim or dispute and specifically without limitation of the foregoing shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class Warranty Information 316 action The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator whose award may not exceed in form or amount the relief allowed by the applicable law The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association AAA Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act The laws of the State of Texas without reference to its choice of laws principles shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the EULA For any arbitration in which your total damage claim
45. card Your data may become damaged or lost if the battery runs out while you are using the microSD card Mounting the SD Card To store photos music videos and other applications You must mount install the SD card prior to use Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection with your computer Important You must enable USB storage to mount the SD card 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Storage 2 Tap Mount SD card 53 Communicating with the SD card 1 Insert the SD card into the external SD card slot For more information refer to Installing the microSD Memory Card on page 12 2 Verify the card is properly mounted Note Your device is configured to be used as a storage media device by default If it does not respond properly you will need to verify the Debugging mode is not enabled 3 Configure the device for USB mass storage mode connection by verifying Debugging mode is not enabled From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Developer options e Remove a check mark from the USB debugging field if present e For more information refer to USB Debugging on page 280 4 Connect the USB cable to the phone and connect the cable to the computer 5 Confirm the new mounted drive appears as a new drive on your computer As soon as the connection is established a drive letter is assigned to the device s storage device 6 To disconnect the new drive
46. certain phone actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope Note Motion must be enabled for this feature to be active For more information refer to Motion Settings on page 276 41 Using Gestures By activating the various gesture features within the Motion menu page 276 you can access a variety of time saving functions To activate motion 1 Press gt l and then tap Settings gt Motion 2 Activate the feature by touching and sliding the Motion slider to the right to turn iton BEO 3 Tap the desired on screen motion option The following is a description some of the most commonly used gestures Shake to update Once enabled shake your device to rescan for Bluetooth devices rescan for Wi Fi devices Refresh a Web page etc e Turn over to mute pause Once enabled mute incoming calls and any playing sounds by turning the device display down on a surface This is the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture 3 Tap any of the on screen icons to launch the Tutorial provides access to advanced gesture settings and associated application tutorials such as e Learn about motions tap an on screen entry to display a Using Sub Menus brief tutorial on the use of the selected function Sub menus are available from within most screen and applications 1 Press B A sub menu displays at the bottom of the screen 2 Tap an available on screen option Note Motion sett
47. choose from Groups Favorites Contacts or Logs e Text Input field a field where text number or other characters can be entered e CAPS ALT key When in 123ABC mode this key changes the Capitalization of the subsequent entered characters When in SYM mode this key can show additional symbol characters e SWYPE settings Touch and hold this button to access the Swype settings screen e Text Input mode There are two available modes 123ABC and SYM 123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few common punctuation marks Text mode button indicates SYM SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers Text mode button indicates 123ABC Entering Text 82 Using 123ABC Mode in SWYPE A new message In 123ABC mode you can enter only letters and a few common punctuation marks from the on screen keyboard Recipient 5 ecipients The text mode key shows ffad t j Text input field EE mai ay 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text fours input field to reveal the on screen keyboard Current 2 Tap se to configure the keyboard for 123ABC mode rocks rocked ticks Mode showing letters and numbers on the on screen keys q ue re Once in this mode the text input type shows H CAPS ALT s e key Note After typing an initia uppercase character the EW key Delete changes to PX and all letters that follow are in lower case SWYPE aoe Input mode Voice actions 3 Swipe your finger continuously over the letter
48. deletes any words you have added to Swype s dictionary e Version displays the software version information 5 Tap Language Options to activate and select the current text input language Default language is US English e Living language allows you to automatically update Swype with popular new words Tap Accept to continue the process Note To use Swype Connect you must have an active data connection available network or Wi Fi Tap Swype Connect to activate social media 7 Tap Personalization to access and manage your personalization and configure data settings personal dictionary Log into the available accounts to e Register now allows you register for the Swype Connect add help personalize your personal dictionary with service which allows you to backup your Swype dictionary and commonly used words or names from your available sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices accounts Follow the on screen instructions to backup and sync your e Edit Dictionary allows you to edit your current personal Swype dictionary based on an email address dictionary Enter the activation code received after your email has been e Facebook allows you to log into your current Facebook confirmed account from where contact names are added to your Swype s Backup amp Syne when active allows you to backup your personal dictionary for later use when you enter names into text Swype dictionary and sync your Sw
49. different folder Rotate left allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a counterclockwise direction Rotate right allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a clockwise direction 151 Crop provides an on screen box that allows you to crop the current picture Tap Save to update the image with the new dimensions or tap Discard to ignore any changes Edit launches the Photo Editor application The Photo Editor application can be downloaded from the Play Store Set as allows you to assign the current image as a Contact photo Home screen Lock screen or Home and lock screens Buddy photo share allows you to share the current image with active ChatON buddies Print allows you to print the current image on a compatible Samsung printer Rename allows you to rename the current file Scan for nearby devices scans for devices that can receive or display the earby DLNA compliant current image Details files details such as Title Time Width Height Orientation File Size and Path Assigning an Image as a Contact Photo 1 From the Home screen tap vane Apps gt ave Gallery a 2 Select a folder location and tap a file to open it 3 With the image displayed press El and then tap Setas gt Contact photo 4 Tap a contact to make a selection 5 Use the on screen crop the image by dragging it around or out from its corners 6
50. i 2 Press amp and then tap Contacts to display Select any of the following to filter according to the selection e All contacts allows you to display all available Contacts e Phone lists those Contacts currently found only on your Phone e SIM lists those Contacts currently found only on your SIM card e Samsung account lists those Contacts currently found and sync d within the Samsung account e Google lists those Contacts currently found within the Google account Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync lists those Contacts currently found within the Exchange account e Customized list allows you to enable which account categories are displayed For example on Google contacts you can filter which Contact categories are shown Friends Family etc Adding more Contacts via Accounts and Sync When you synchronize applications such as Facebook Twitter MySpace a corporate email account or Google using the Accounts and sync option synchronizes the data from the selected account type with your Contacts list 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings and then navigate to the Accounts area 2 Tap Add account 3 Determine which type of account information you want to synchronize with your Contact list Selections are Samsung account Email Facebook Google LDAP or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 4 Tap an account type to add 5 Follow the prompts The selected account type synchronizes with your Contacts list
51. icon at the top left of the Application bar Changing Library View You can change the way you view the contents of your library 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt ww Play Music as 2 While in a selection or screen tap G near the top left of the Application bar and then scroll left or right to access the various tabs 3 Available tabs include PLAYLISTS RECENT ARTISTS ALBUMS SONGS or GENRES Note The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid or list view depending on the view Searching for Music in Your Library 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Ge Play Music E 2 Tap Search to search through your available songs 3 Type the name of an artist album song or playlist Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search box 4 Tap a matching song to play it tap a matching album artist or playlist to view a list of its songs Changing Music Settings 1 From the Home screen tap ww Play Music 2 Press and then make a selection e Shuffle all Play all songs in a random order e Apps gt rece Multimedia 162 e Choose on device music In addition to playing the music that you add to your online library you can play music stored on your device s internal storage Then you can listen to music when you have no Internet connection To do this make some of your online music available offline e Settings Provides access to the Play Music settings e
52. in addition to the picture tap anywhere on the screen to display them 1 Tap a video to select it 2 Tap gt to play the video 3 Press E for additional options Camera Gallery Options The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera images 1 From the Home screen tap bee Apps gt KA Gallery Select a folder location ex Camera and tap an image to open it or Touch and hold an image to place a box around the file and select multiple files or Tap the upper right camera to begin taking pictures that are placed in this folder or Tap the on screen image and use either of the following image menu options e Camera fo allows you to access the camera camcorder functions Multimedia 150 e Share via allows you to share the picture via Flipboard Picasa Google Bluetooth Wi Fi Direct Messaging Gmail and Email e Slideshow gt appears in Landscape mode allows you to see your videos in a slideshow e Delete ii appears in Landscape mode allows you to delete the current video 4 Press l for additional options such as Slideshow appears in Portrait mode allows you to see your videos in a slideshow Delete appears in Portrait mode allows you to delete the current video Face tag allows you to activate deactivate face recognition for use with external social media applications Copy to clipboard allows you to copy one or more pictures to a
53. increase the in call volume e Call forwarding configures call forwarding options For more information refer to Configuring Call Forwarding on page 244 e Wi Fi Calling allows you to access the Wi Fi Calling settings e Additional settings allows you to configure additional call settings For more information refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 245 e Voicemail service allows you to assign the service e Voicemail settings displays the settings for the voicemail e Ringtone assigns your device s ringtone e Vibrate configures the vibrate settings Choose from Always Only in silent mode or Never e TTY mode allows you to configure the TTY settings For more information refer to TTY Mode on page 245 e Hearing aids allows you to enable disable hearing aid compatibility For more information refer to HAC Mode on page 245 Call rejection 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap K Phone Press l and then tap Call settings gt Call rejection Activate the feature by moving the Auto reject mode Slider to the right Tap Auto reject mode and tap one of the following options e All numbers to reject all calls e Auto reject numbers to reject all calls in your Reject list Tap Auto reject list Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list Tap Unknown to create a checkmark and automatically reject all calls that are not in your Contacts list Changing Your S
54. information Next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts any updates contacts make to email account names email addresses etc automatically update in your contacts list 1 2 Note The information is still maintained in both entries but From the Home screen tap A Tap a contact name the name you want to link to another entry to reveal the Contact entry s Overview Screen Note Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account information Press and then tap Join contact Tap the second contact entry the entry in which to link The second contact is now linked with the first and the account information is merged into one screen displays in one record for easier viewing when you link the contacts Important It is the second contact image that is displayed for both but the first contact s name that is used For example If Amy original entry is joined with Julie Second entry Julie appears to disappear and only Amy remains Tap the Amy entry showing the Julie image to view both 5 Tap the main linked contact to view the contact information you linked The contacts and information displays with an icon next to the contact name to indicate what type of account information is contained in the entry Contacts 102 Unjoining a Contact 1 From the Home screen tap EJ 2 Tap a contact name the account name from which you want to unjoin an entry This reveals the
55. is enabled This icon is followed by an audible beep Displays your battery is currently charging Displays your current battery charge level is low Charge 28 15 Displays your current battery charge level is very low Charge 15 5 Shows your current battery only has up to 4 power remaining and will soon shutdown Charge 4 1 Displays when connected to the EDGE network Displays when your phone is communicating with the EDGE network HOOD SS E Displays when connected to the 3G network 3G indicator is only seen when roaming Displays when your phone is communicating with the 3G network 3G indicator is only seen when roaming Displays when connected to the HSPA network Displays when your phone is communicating with the HSPA network Displays when the phone has detected an active USB connection and is in a USB Debugging mode Displays when there is a new text message Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to be delivered Displays when there is a new voicemail message Displays when there is a new visual voicemail message El Be OB g o VW Ih Displays in the notifications window when there is a new Email message Displays in the notifications window when there is anew Gmail message Displays when a new Google notification has been received Displays when the T Mobile Name ID application did not recognize a recent number and would like to know wh
56. it is necessary to enable the Use client certification option Messages 134 10 With the new server information entered tap Next 15 Identify your new work email account with a unique 11 Read the on screen Activation and when prompted name Ex Work then tap Done tap OK The device then verifies your incoming server Opening an Exchange Email settings 1 From the Home screen tap gt Email 12 If prompted read the Remote security administration 2 Tap the account name field upper left to open the information and tap OK to accept the service and complete email account list page continue 3 Select an exchange email account and tap an email 13 Adjust the various on screen configuration fields and message tap Next It may take a few seconds for the next screen Refreshing Exchange Email 1 From the Home screen tap Re gt Koy Email 2 Select an Exchange email account 3 Tap O Refresh to load e Enabling the Automatically download attachments when connected to Wi Fi option decreases the wait time to access large email attachments 14 If prompted read the Activate device administrator screen and tap Activate to complete the email setup process Note This process can take a few minutes If the previous setup screen re appears ignore it and do not alter any fields during this process 135 Composing Exchange Email a NS From the Home screen tap FE gt Email Press
57. more information refer to Play Music on page 161 195 Play Store Formerly known as the Android Market this application provides access to downloadable applications and games to install on your phone The Play Store also allows you to provide feedback and comments about an application or flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account Accessing the Play Store 1 From the Home screen tap EEEE Apps gt E Play Store e 2 Ifnot already logged in with your Google account tap Next 3 Tap Existing and enter your Google account information 4 Tap Accept to agree to the Play Store terms of service For more information refer to Downloading a New Google Application on page 196 Downloading a New Google Application To download a new application you will need to use your Google account to sign in to the Play Store The home page provides several ways to find applications The home page features applications and includes a list of item applications by category a list of games a link to search and a link to My apps 1 From the Home screen tap lt tc Apps gt gt Play Store ae Browse through the categories find an application you re interested in and tap the name Read the application descriptions 4 5 Important If the selected application requires access to data or control of a function on your device
58. multitasking features Apps available to download from the Google Play Store e Pre loaded e reader applications such as Play Books and Play Magazines Google Play Music Polaris Viewer for document viewing Assisted GPS Scout by TeleNav GPS Navigation and Google Navigation Webkit based browser Expandable memory slot supports up to 32GB Mobile HotSpot Capability Lookout Security Security Backup Missing Device capabilities T Mobile TV Slacker Radio SWYPE text input technology Understanding Your Device 26 e Video Chat via Google Talk e Wi Fi Calling via the use of an updated SIM card Access to thousands of Movies and TV Shows with the Samsung Media Hub HD Video Player 720p Codec MPEG4 H 264 H 263 VC 1 WMV7 8 VP8 MP43 Format 3GP MP4 WMV ASF and AVI 27 Front View The following illustrations show the main elements of your device The following list correlates to the illustrations aa Headset jack allows you to connect a hands free headset so you can listen to music Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in standby mode with the phone open or adjust the voice volume during a call When receiving an incoming call e Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone Display shows all the information needed to operate your phone such as the connection status received signal strength phone battery level and
59. must have an active data 3G 4G or Wi Fi connection The Maps application does not cover every country or city m From the Home screen tap RA Maps Important For best results it is recommended that you enable all of your location services For more information refer to Location Services on page 256 185 Enabling a Location source Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable a location source To enable the location source you must enable the wireless network or enable the GPS satellites Important The more location determining functions are enabled the more accurate the determination will be of your position 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Location services 2 Tap Use wireless networks allows apps to use data from sources such as Wi Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location 3 Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite 4 Tap Location and Google search to allow Google to use your location data to improve your search results and other services So nin bon nll Deo inn e Layers allows you to switch map views Tip Enabling this feature allows you to locate places of Traffic available only in selected Real time traf interest at the street level However this also requires a Ta 2 ial only in selected areas Real time n 5 clear view of the sky and uses more ba
60. of frequently used applications to one of the Home screens For more information refer to Customizing the Screens on page 44 You can also add an application icon as a Primary Shortcut that will display on all Home screens If you add an application as a primary shortcut the application icon will not be displayed in the Applications menu Applications The Applications list provides quick access to all the available applications on the phone 411 amp More Provides more than just single tap access to directory assistance and other portals Available categories include 411 Directory Assistance Current Weather and more 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt PY 411 amp More _ 2 Tap an on screen option and follow the on screen prompts Choices include 411 Directory Assistance with Maps Current Weather Horoscopes Sports Report and Recent Searches Applications and Development 174 Calculator Using this feature allows you to use your device as a calculator The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions addition subtraction multiplication and division You can also use this as a scientific calculator 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Calculator SEn Enter the first number using the numeric keys 3 Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the Plus Minus Multiplication or Division key Enter the next number 5 To view the result tap the equals key 6 Repe
61. of recently viewed web pages 213 e Auto fit pages Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of the screen as possible e Block pop ups Prevents popup advertisement or windows from appearing on screen Remove the check mark to disable this function e Text encoding Adjusts the current text encoding e Reset to default Clears all browser data and resets all settings to default Bandwidth management e Preload search results Allows the browser to preload high confidence search results in the background If the device can accurately guess your in progress search it will preempt you by beginning to load the matching Web page before you complete the search request e Page preloading Allows the browser to preload pages in the background Load images Allows web page images to load along with the other text components of a loaded website Labs e Quick controls allows you to enable on screen quick controls via the use of Swype thumb actions e Full screen Allows Web pages to be resized to fit as much of the screen as possible Bluetooth About Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short range communications technology that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices such as headsets and hands free car kits and Bluetooth enabled handhelds computers printers and wireless devices The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to approximately 30 feet Turning Bluetooth On and Off T
62. on your device s display and Indicator area BAO HS Displays your current signal strength The greater the number of bars the stronger the signal Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active You cannot send or receive any calls or access online information Indicates there is no signal available Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone Displays when there is a system error or alert ARE 6 Cai a Displays when a call is in progress Displayed in the Status bar when the current call is minimized Displays when a call is on hold Displayed in the Status bar when the current call is minimized Displays when you have missed an incoming call Displays when you device is set to automatically reject all incoming calls The All numbers option is enabled from within Call settings gt Call rejection gt Auto reject mode menu Displays when the speakerphone is on Displayed in the Status bar when the current call is minimized Displays when the microphone is muted Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always forward Displayed in the Status bar when the current call is minimized For more information referto Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings on page 245 Understanding Your Device 30 o amp b Do eran Displays your current battery charge level Icon shown is fully charged Displays when the current battery is 100 percent charged and the Display battery percentage option
63. only create and submit messages with content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain Warning the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content Domain Free you may add any content to the message e MMS alert alerts you when the messaging modes changes from an SMS text to MMS multimedia mode Push message settings Push messages allows you to receive push messages from the network e Service loading allows you to set the type of service loading Notification Choose from Always Prompt or Never Notification settings Notifications allows you to see message notifications on your status bar Select ringtone allows you to set the ringtone for your message notifications Vibrate allows you to enable disable the vibration mode associated with message alerts e Message alert repetition allows you to set the interval for new message alerts Choose from Once Every 2 minutes or Every 10 minutes Preview message when enabled allows you to view a brief preview of new message text on the Status bar Emergency message settings e Emergency alerts allows you to configure emergency alert settings You can enable disable those alert categories you wish to receive Choose from Imminent extreme alerts Imminent severe alert and AMBER alerts Note The Presidential alerts option can not be disabled e Emergency n
64. options such as Slideshow appears in Portrait mode allows you to see your videos in a slideshow Delete appears in Portrait mode allows you to delete the current video Rename allows you to rename one or more video files Details displays video file information The Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos For photos you can also perform basic editing tasks view a slideshow set photos as wallpaper or caller image and share as a picture message Note If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing the Gallery remove some of the media files from their folders Multimedia 156 Opening the Gallery m From the Home screen tap ihe Apps gt we Gallery For more information refer to Camera Gallery Options on page 150 Note If you stored your files in folders directories on the storage card Gallery displays these folders as separate albums The top left album contains all the pictures in the storage card 157 Using the Video Player The Video Player application plays video files stored on the SD card 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Di Video Player A list of TA sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list See 2 Tap a video file to begin viewing Sharing Videos 1 From the Home screen tap ie Apps gt Di Video Player After a few seconds each on screen video begins to cycle through a preview of the first five secon
65. or deactivate this mode the current mode displays Adjusting the Volume Settings The Volume menu now provides access to various volume settings within one on screen popup menu 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Sound gt Volume 2 Touch and drag the on screen slider to assign the volume settings for any of the following volume levels Music video games and other media Ringtone Notifications or System 3 Tap OK to assign the volume levels Setup the Voice Call Ringtone 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Device ringtone 3 Tap a ringtone from the available list The ringtone briefly plays when selected 4 Tap OK to assign a ringer Setup the Device Vibration This option allows you to set your device to vibrate and ring 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Device vibration 3 Select a vibration pattern and tap OK Setting a Default Notification Ringtone This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for notifications and alarms 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Sound gt Default notifications 2 Tap one of the ringtones and tap OK Vibrate During Ringing This option allows you to activate deactivate the vibration feature 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Sound 2 Tap the Vibrate when ringing field to activate the feature Changing Your Setting
66. or every time the phone wakes up from sleep mode when the screen automatically turns off The Screen lock menu allows to choose from a variety of locking features such as Swipe Face unlock Face and voice Pattern PIN Password or None Using Swipe This feature is the least secure locking method and only requires that a user swipe the screen to unlock the device 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Lock screen 2 Tap Screen lock gt Swipe 257 Using Face Unlock This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone This feature is less secure than PIN Pattern and Password locks and can be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Lock screen Tap Screen lock gt Face unlock Read the on screen notification and tap Next From the About Face Unlock screen tap Set it up Follow the on screen instructions Ss Pep Using Face and Voice Unlock This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone This feature is less secure than PIN Pattern and Password locks and can be bypassed by someone else who looks similar to you 1 eo Pon From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Lock screen Tap Screen lock gt Face and voice Read the on screen notification and tap Next From the About Face Unlock screen tap Set it up Follow the on screen instructions Once prompted to speak and unlock comman
67. prompted select a Contacts Sync option Choose from Sync all Sync with existing contacts or Don t sync Tap Sync to complete the process 9 Return to the Accounts and sync screen and resync this new Social Network account To resync Social Network Contacts 1 From the Home screen press El and then tap Settings and then navigate to the Accounts area 2 Tap O within the SNS account field to reveal the account s synchronization settings screen 109 3 Choose the parameters to sync ex Sync Calendar Sync Contacts or Sync Gallery and tap Sync now Note From the main Accounts and sync page you can also tap Sync all to resync all accounts Additional Contact Options Sending an Email to a Contact Note Contacts must contain and email account and address before you can use the Send email feature 1 From the Home screen tap EJ 2 Press l and then tap Send email Contacts that contain an email address display 3 Tap the contact s to which you want to send an email A check mark displays next to the selection Note The select contact must have an email as part of their details screen 4 Tap Done 5 Select an email account type 6 Compose the email and tap Send Exportlimport For more information refer to Copying Contact Information on page 105 Contact List Settings From this menu you can determine the default storage location for Contacts display your phone s primary number and view ser
68. rename process To set visibility 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active 2 From the top of the Bluetooth settings page toggle the state of the visibility check mark Activating this feature enabled your device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate SSN 215 Note Your device visibility is based on the time set within the Visible time out field 2 Minutes 5 Minutes 1 Hour or Never This value appears as a countdown within this Visibility timeout field To scan for Bluetooth devices 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page tap Scan to search for visible external Bluetooth compatible devices such as headsets devices printers and computers To review your Bluetooth received files 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page press l and then tap Received files Pairing Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted connections between your device and another Bluetooth device When you pair devices they share a passkey allowing for fast secure connections while bypassing the discovery and authentication process Note Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one time process Once pairing is established the devices continue to recognize their partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode To pair your device with another Bluetooth device 1 Verify Bluetooth is active
69. screen Wi Fi settings Once set up for Wi Fi connectivity your device automatically uses Wi Fi when available for all your mobile services 1 From the Home screen press amp and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi 2 Press l and then tap Advanced Configure the settings as desired The available Wi Fi connection are displayed with a security type displayed next to them Network Notification By default when Wi Fi is on you receive notifications in the Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi Fi network You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to receive notifications 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi Press l and then tap Advanced Tap Network notification A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Network notification is active Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark and deactivate this feature Wi Fi During Sleep By default when your device enter a sleep mode your Wi Fi connection stays on all the time If the feature is Never enabled during sleep that current data usage is taken over by your SIM and its network connection 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi 2 Press and then tap Advanced gt Keep Wi Fi on during sleep Select an available option e Always maintains your current active Wi Fi connection even during sleep e Only when plugged in maintains the active Wi Fi connection
70. screen instructions 7 If you have already verified your email address tap Activate account 8 Confirm the Samsung account icon no longer appears in the Notifications area at the top of the screen Note Without confirming your email address and following the documented procedures related applications will not function properly since it is Samsung account that is managing their username and password access Voice Mail Setting Up Your Voice Mail Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to voicemail even if your device is in use or turned off As soon as your battery is charged and the SIM card inserted activate your voicemail account Important Always use a password to protect against unauthorized access For new users follow the instructions below to set up voice mail Note Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network Getting Started 22 1 From the Home screen tap i and then touch and hold the key until the device dials voice mail You may be prompted to enter a password 2 Follow the tutorial to create a password a greeting and a display name Accessing Your Voice Mail You can access your Voice Mail by either pressing and holding on the keypad or by using the phone s Application icon then tapping the Voice Mail application To access Voice Mail using the menu 1 From the Home screen tap i and then touch and hold until the device dials voice mail Note Touching a
71. scscsssssssssseescseeseseesesees 174 Google eee cece eee eee 142 Applications 0 00 cece eee eae 174 Messenger e ses eee seen eae 142 411 amp MOTE nartcseunatennsaaneaeastese 174 Section 8 Multimedia ssssecee 144 Calculator ccc eee eeeeueeees 175 Assigning the Default Storage Location 144 Calendar 0 0 e eee 175 Using the Camera 000 cece u ee 145 CallerTunes 0c cece eae 177 Camera Options 005 146 Camera 0 cece eee 178 Using the Camcorder 153 CHOME ws ereserd acide been atv nacrearea ears 178 The Gallery 00 cece eee eee eee 156 GIOCK E 8 ceedaiantaiaviakawaaesag Be 179 Using the Video Player 157 CONTACTS EEE EEE tated adedence pdacee 182 3 Downloads 0000 eee e eee 182 Emaili cite iia aoa wraina ae ara h 182 Flipboard 0 000 cece eee eee 182 Galerye Gf28 ooh wi Gs ha ia sa aaar E 183 Gmail E eee 183 GOOLE aati se Prats maw Maem 183 Googla Het Acai es abet ae else 183 INtOMNGE esses ainda hve Ve RE Pe 184 Local irene AN Ap tecete ce hs 184 Lookout Security 0 184 Mapsi deck eka ce nites bck ghd 185 Media Hub 000005 187 MEMO tts og tenets area ed ale 188 Messaging 00000 eee eee 188 Messenger 0 0 00 eee ee eee 189 Mobile HotSpot 0 0 189 MobileLife Widget
72. simply remove the USB cable from your device Unmounting the SD card Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the SD card while removing it from the slot 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Storage 2 Tap Unmount SD card gt OK 3 After the SD card will be unmounted message displays and the Mount SD card now appears in the menu list remove the SD card For more information refer to Removing the microSD Memory Card on page 13 SD card Memory Status To view the memory allocation for your external SD card m From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Storage The available memory displays under both the Device memory and SD card headings Erasing Files from the SD card To erase files from the SD card using the device 1 Ensure the SD card is mounted For more information refer to Unmounting the SD card on page 54 2 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Storage gt Mount SD card 3 Tap Format SD card gt Format SD card gt Delete all to format the SD card The SD card formats and erases all the data stored on it Memory Card 54 Factory Data Reset From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to the factory default settings 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Backup and reset 2 Tap Factory data reset This action erases all data from your device except current system software and bundl
73. the Image viewer and the various viewing options for a selected picture The last picture you took will be displayed as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon Camera button takes a photo when pressed in Camera mode Camera Camcorder Mode allows you to take a photo in various modes Once you change the mode the corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the display Slide the button up for Camera or down for Camcorder Multimedia 148 e Slideshow gt appears in Landscape mode allows you to Storage location Connection Status indicates the A y ol see your photos in a slideshow device is connected to an adapter and the current storage location for images Phone or Memory card Delete appears in Landscape mode allows you to on the device delete the current picture 3 Press B for additional options such as Slideshow appears in Portrait mode allows you to see your photos in a slideshow Delete appears in Portrait mode allows you to delete the Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options After you take a photo or record a video you can access various options Photo viewing options A current picture 1 Tap a thumbnail to view the picture T Face tag allows you to activate deactivate face recognition Note If no control icons are displayed on the screen in for use with extemal social media applications addition to the picture tap anywhere on the screen to Copy to clipboard allows you
74. the Notification bar To access the Wi Fi Advanced Settings menu aaaaaauaaaauasauasasasasasasasasasasasssmslsltlM 1 From the Home screen press amp and then tap Note Use of wireless data connections such as Wi Fi and Settings gt Wi Fi Bluetooth can reduce battery life and use times 2 Press l and then tap Advanced Manually Scan for a Wi Fi Network 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on ON 3 Tap Scan 223 USB Tethering This option allows you to share your device s mobile data connection via a direct USB connection between your device and a single computer The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices Note You can not mount your device s microSD card to your computer while using the USB tethering feature If additional software or USB drivers are required navigate to http www samsung com us support downloads To connect using USB Tethering 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Tethering and Mobile HotSpot Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your phone When prompted for a USB mode press g to exit the menu Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu This places a green check mark next to the entry and
75. the Terms and Conditions formation Select the desired information from the pop up men Help provides help information Media Hub m From the Home screen tap Media Hub u 5 Apps gt For more information refer to Media Hub on page 158 Memo This feature allows you to create a memo 1 From the Home screen tap ttt Apps gt T Memo a 2 Tap Create memo Note If this is your first memo you are automatically taken to the new memo screen 3 Compose the memo 4 Tap Save For more information refer to Text Input Methods on page 78 Memo options 1 While viewing the list of Memos press B and select one of the following options e Search allows you to search within the current set of memos e Delete allows you to delete one or more memos e Print allows you to print one or more memos e Share via allows you to send one or several of your memos at one time Select a memo and tap send to deliver it via Text only Text only vnt or S Note file snb e Sync memo allows you to sync your memos Google Docs or send individual memos 2 Touch and hold the memo then select Share via and choose the method to send this memo Text only Text file vnt or S Note file snb Messaging This application allows you to use the Short Message Service SMS to send and receive short text messages to and from other mobile phones You can also use the Multi Media Service MMS to cr
76. the bottom of the screen to open Without a SIM card you can only make an emergency call with the phone normal cell phone service is not available Making an Emergency Call without a SIM card installed 1 Tap Emergency call from the on screen display to make an emergency call 2 Enter 9 1 1 and tap EJ Complete your call During this type of call you will have access to the Speaker mode Keypad and End Call features the Notifications panel 1 3 Tap End to end the currently active call 2 Mute Speaker Note Selecting Location consent may drain battery power For more information refer to Power Saving Mode on page 252 3 Tap E to exit this calling mode Notifications Name ID fo Call Functions and Contacts List 58 Making an Emergency call with a SIM card installed The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency number a 1 tap process Before you can resume normal calling operations you should first exit this mode 1 Swipe the Lock screen to unlock the device 2 From the Home screen tap K 3 Enter the emergency number ex 911 and then tap 4 Complete your call During this type of call you will have access to the Speaker mode Keypad and End Call features e After completing your emergency call appears in the Notification area until you exit the Emergency calling mode Note This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly than a normal calling mode 59 5 At the Em
77. the on screen instructions to configure the VPN Client Yelp Yelp is an online urban city guide that helps people find cool places to eat shop drink relax and play Its the fun and easy way to find review and talk about what s great in your world 1 From the Home screen tap 7 Apps gt Yelp 2 If prompted log into your existing account or create a new one 3 Follow the on screen prompts YouTube YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload and share videos and view them in MPEG 4 format 1 From the Home screen tap tees Apps gt YouTube 2 When the screen loads you can begin searching and viewing posted videos To configure YouTube Settings m Press and then tap Settings and configure the following parameters e General High quality on mobile when enabled allows you to start all videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile network Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by on screen captions Choose from Small Medium Large or Huge Uploads specifies network preferences for uploads Content localization allows you to prioritize channels and videos from a specific country or region Improve YouTube allows you to anonymously send YouTube information to help improve the application e Channel Feed Content Sets the content that you want to appear within your channel feed All activity is the default option Applica
78. the phone or battery come in contact with liquids Liquids can get into the phone s circuits leading to corrosion Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard If the phone and or battery get wet have them checked by your service provider or contact Samsung even if they appear to be working properly Do not place your battery in or near a heat source Excessive heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the phone or the battery to explode Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven hair dryer iron or radiator Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high temperatures Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire The phone or the battery may explode when overheated e Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery Do not let leaking battery fluid come in contact with your eyes skin or clothing For safe disposal options contact your nearest Samsung authorized service center Avoid dropping the cell phone Dropping the phone or the battery especially on a hard surface can potentially cause damage to the phone and battery If you suspect damage to the phone or battery take it to a service center for inspection Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects Accidental short circuiting can occur when a me
79. time and the biggest reason for this are background applications These are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still active but minimized The Task Manager not only lets you see which of these applications are still active in the background but also easily lets you choose which applications are left running and which are closed Note The larger the number of applications running on your device the larger the energy drain on your battery Task Manger Overview m Press and hold Home and then tap ie Task manager This screen contains the following tabs e Active applications display those currently active applications running on your device Getting Started 24 e Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from the Play Store that are taking up memory space Tap Uninstall to remove them from your phone e RAM which displays the amount of current RAM Random Access Memory currently being used and allow you to Clear Memory e Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used space within the System storage USB storage and external SD card Help provides additional battery saving and RAM management techniques Shutting Down an Currently Active Application 1 25 Press and hold Home and then tap 4 Task manager From the Active applications tab tap End to close selected applications or Tap End all to close all background running applications
80. time microSD Card Slot internal allows you use a microSD card to expand the memory of your phone Menu key displays a list of options available for the current screen From the Home screen it displays Add apps and widgets Create folder Set wallpaper Edit page Search and Settings options Microphone is used during phone calls and allows other callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them It is also used to make voice note recordings and record stereo audio during ideo recordings 10 11 12 13 USB Power Accessory connector allows you to connect a power cable or optional accessories such as a USB data cable Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears entries Home key displays the Home screen when pressed Power End key ends a call or switches the phone off and on Press and hold for two seconds to turn toggle the Silent mode or Airplane mode states turn the device on or off or Restart Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while facing the screen and allows you to video conference Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to the surface of the screen This is typically used to detect when your face is pressed up against the screen such as during a phone call While talking on the phone the sensor detects talk activity and locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses Receiver allows you to hear the other caller and the different ring tones or sounds offered by your
81. to backup your Swype dictionary and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices Follow the on screen instructions to backup and sync your dictionary based on an email address Enter the activation code received after your email has been confirmed e Backup amp Sync when active allows you to backup your Swype dictionary and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices e Contribute usage data when enabled allows the Nuance application to collect usage data for better word predictions e Cellular data when enabled activates cellular data usage by the Swype application so it can receive program updates language downloads and other related features via your existing data connection Entering Text 80 81 Tap Personalization to access and manage your personal dictionary Log into the available accounts to add help personalize your personal dictionary with commonly used words or names from your available accounts e Edit Dictionary allows you to edit your current personal Swype dictionary Facebook allows you to log into your current Facebook account from where contact names are added to your Swype s personal dictionary for later use when you enter names into text fields Helps recognize familiar names Twitter allows you to sing into your existing Twitter account from where names and words are added to your personal dictionary Helps recognize familiar names and words e Gmail allow
82. to launch voice search by saying the word Google Download offline speech recognition Enables voice input while offline 4 Press 5 to return to the previous screen Configuring Text to speech This feature allows the device to provide a verbal readout of on screen data such as messages and incoming caller information This action is called TTS Text To Speech 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Text to speech output 2 Select a current Preferred TTS engine from the list of available options The default is Google Text to speech 3 Tap Fey to configure the engine s settings 4 Configure the General options to alter the settings associated with this feature e Speech rate adjusts the rate at which on screen text is spoken by the device Choose from Very slow Slow Normal Fast and Very fast e Listen to an example plays a short example of what the text to speech feature sounds like on your device when activated e Driving mode incoming calls and new notifications are automatically read out loud In a single motion touch and slide to the right to tum it on Once active tap the Driving mode field to reveal the associated settings Select those applications that will use TTS while driving mode is activated Choose from Incoming call Message New emails New voicemail Alarm Schedule or Unlock screen Configuring the Mouse TrackPad This feature
83. to reveal the on screen keyboard Rotate the phone counterclockwise to a landscape orientation if desired 2 Tap on to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode Once in this mode the text input type shows aec 3 Tap a number symbol or emoticon character 4 Tap EEZ to return to ABC mode To enter symbols 1 Tap Ta to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode 2 Tap the appropriate symbol key or Tap J button to cycle through additional pages e The first number on this key indicates which page 1 2 or 3 of additional characters is active From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Fey adjacent to the Samsung keyboard field From within an active text entry screen touch and hold Input Methods and select Settings then tap from the bottom of the screen to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen Set any of the following options e Portrait keyboard types allows you to choose a keyboard configuration Qwerty keyboard default or 3x4 keyboard e Input languages sets the input language Tap a language from the available list The keyboard is updated to the selected language e Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode This must be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings Touch and hold to access the advanced settings Entering Text 88 89 e T9 Trace like using Swipe allows you to enter text by sliding your fingers across the on screen keyboa
84. to the song name and select Add to playlist 4 Select the desired target playlist Playing a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap ww Play Music 2 Select the PLAYLISTS tab 3 Tap next to a playlist title and tap Play Apps gt PEET rece reer rere Multimedia 166 Deleting a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Gp Play Music 2 Display the PLAYLISTS library view 3 Tap P next to a playlist title and tap Delete gt OK Music Player Playing Music 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Music Player Music player tips display 2 Tap a library category tab to select the music category All Playlists Albums Artists Music square or Folders 3 Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback 167 4 Use any of the following Music Player controls AMBRE eEe E HME Pause the song Start the song after pausing Press and hold to rewind the song Tap to go to previous song Press and hold to fast forward the song Tap to go to next song Volume control Plays the entire song list once Replays the current list when the list ends Repeats the currently playing song shuffles the current list of songs randomly songs play in order and are not shuffled provides access to the Music square lists the current playlist songs displays the current song in the player window provides access to the Equalizer Making a Song a Phone Ringtone 1 From the Home s
85. use it or when it may cause interference or danger When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another device read its user s guide for detailed safety instructions Do not connect incompatible products Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio Frequency RF signals However certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless mobile device Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives Implantable Medical Devices A minimum separation of six 6 inches should be maintained between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable medical device such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator to avoid potential interference with the device Persons who have such devices Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six 6 inches from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to minimize the potential for interference Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place Health and Safety Information 300 Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your implantable medical device If you have any questions about using your wireless mobile device with an implantabl
86. using the up or down volume keys General settings Delete old messages deletes old messages when the limit is reached rather than overwriting them e Text message limit allows you to set a limit on how many text messages are allowed in one conversation Multimedia message limit allows you to set a limit on how many multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation 123 Text message SMS settings e Delivery reports when this option is activated the network informs you whether or not your message was delivered e Manage SIM card messages allows you to manage the messages stored on the SIM card e Message center allows you to enter the number of your message center where your messages reside while the system is attempting to deliver them e Input mode allows you to set the input mode for your text messages Choose from GSM Alphabet Unicode or Automatic Multimedia message MMS settings Delivery reports when this option is activated the network informs you whether or not your message was delivered Read reports when this option is activated your phone receives a request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient e Auto retrieve allows the message system to automatically retrieve messages e Roaming auto retrieve allows the message system to automatically retrieve while roaming e Creation mode allows you to select the creation mode Free Restricted or Warning Restricted you can
87. which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to default settings Please contact the Samsung Customer Care Center for details Important Please provide warranty information proof of purchase to Samsung s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service at no charge If the warranty has expired on the device charges may apply Warranty Information 310 Samsung Telecommunications America LLC 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson Texas 75082 Phone 1 800 SAMSUNG Phone 1 888 987 HELP 4357 No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written approval Specifications and availability subject to change without notice 111611 End User License Agreement for Software IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Samsung for software owned by Samsung and its affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that accompanies this EULA which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials online or electronic documentation in connection with your use of this device Software 311 This device requires the use of preloaded software in its normal operation BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE
88. your password from time to time tapping Confirm The Unlock pattern is set 1 From the Home screen press amp and then tap 7 Enter the backup PIN code and tap Continue Settings gt Lock screen 8 Reenter the PIN to reconfirm the previous entry and 2 Tap Screen lock tap OK 3 Retrace your current pattern on the screen 4 Tap Pattern and repeat steps 3 7 from the previous section Deleting the Screen Lock Pattern 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Lock screen 2 Tap Screen lock Retrace your current pattern on the screen 4 Tap None 259 What If I Forget my Pattern If you forget your device s lock pattern you can unlock your device or reset it using your Google Account credentials When you enter the wrong unlock pattern too many times you should see an option at the bottom of the screen that says Forgot pattern Follow these steps to use either your PIN or email address Important You can only enter an incorrect lock pattern 5 times before the device is locked Important If you are unsuccessful in retrieving your lock pattern or unlocking your device please contact T Mobile for assistance To unlock your device with a PIN code 1 Tap Forgot pattern located at the bottom of the screen 2 Scroll down and tap the Type PIN code field and use the on screen keypad to enter the backup PIN code you setup when you created your lock pattern 3 Tap OK 4 Ifyou have forgotten
89. 1 Video Player The Video Player application plays video files stored on your microSD card m From the Home screen tap t Apps gt Dl Video Player For more information refer to Using the Video Player on page 157 Visual Voicemail Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological order m From the Home screen tap Apps gt J Visual Voicemail j For more information refer to Visual Voicemail on page 23 Voice Recorder The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long and then immediately send it as a message tiii 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Voice Recorder 2 Tap Record to record an audio file 3 Tap a Stop to stop recording The file automatically saves to the Voice list 4 Tap rit Pause to pause the recording of an audio file 5 Tap Cancel to cancel the recording of an audio file 6 Tap e List to display a list of current recordings 7 From the Recorded files page press and then select one of the following e Share via and select a method in which to share this audio file Selections are Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct Refer to each specific section depending on the method you selected to send this voice recording Applications and Development 202 Delete allows you to delete 1 o
90. 1 GRANT OF LICENSE Samsung grants you the following rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA You may install use access display and run one copy of the Software on the local hard disk s or other permanent storage media of one computer and use the Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time and you may not make the Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple computers at the same time You may make one copy of the Software in machine readable form for backup purposes only provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary notices contained on the original Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source licenses The open source license provisions may override some of the terms of this EULA We make the applicable open source licenses available to you on the Legal Notices section of the Settings menu of your device 2 RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP Samsung reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and treaties Samsung or its suppliers own the title copyright and other intellectual property rights in the Software The Software is licensed not sold 3 LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS You may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to discover the source code or algorithms of the Software except a
91. 6 After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact information For more information refer to Joining Contact Information on page 101 To add Facebook content to your Contacts list You can now add your Facebook contact information such as pictures email and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list All of their current contact information is then migrated over to your phone If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly different name separate entries are created and can later be linked joined together into a single entry Important This process not only synchronizes your contact information but also your status events and more 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings and then navigate to the Accounts area 2 Tap Add account Facebook 3 You are prompted to download the Facebook application from the Play Store e Tap Install gt Accept amp download to complete the process e Tap Open to launch the application Contacts 108 4 Log into your Facebook account e Enter your account s access Email and Password information and tap Log in 5 If prompted configure any requested optional permissions and tap Log in 6 Tap those contact settings you wish to synchronize all are enabled by default A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled e Choose from Sync interval settings Sync Calendar or Sync Gallery 7 Tap Done to complete the login and sync process 8 If
92. AID SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS EXCLUSIONS AND DISCLAIMERS INCLUDING SECTIONS 10 11 12 AND 13 SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE 14 U S GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS The Software is licensed only with restricted rights and as commercial items consisting of commercial software and commercial software documentation with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein All Products are provided only with restricted rights with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein All Software and Products are provided subject to Federal Acquisition Regulation FAR 52 227 19 15 APPLICABLE LAW This EULA is governed by the laws of the jurisdiction where you are a resident or if a resident of the United States by the laws of the state of Texas without regard to its conflict of law provisions This EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods the application of which is expressly excluded 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION a Non United States residents If a dispute controversy or difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of the Software is not amicably settled it shall
93. AP These WAPs can either be Open unsecured as within most Hot Spots or Secured requiring knowledge of the Router name and password Note After you complete a connection to an active Wi Fi network the Wi Fi Calling feature will automatically be enabled Activating Wi Fi By default your device s Wi Fi feature is turned off deactivated Activating Wi Fi allows your device to discover and connect to compatible in range WAPs Wireless Access Points 1 From the Home screen press amp and then tap Settings 221 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on ION The slider color indicates the activation status The device scans for available in range wireless networks and displays them under Wi Fi networks on the same screen Connecting to a Wi Fi Network 1 From the Home screen press El and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi The network names and security settings Open network or Secured with WEP of detected Wi Fi networks display in the Wi Fi networks section 2 Tap the network you wish to connect to Note When you select an open network you are automatically connected 3 Enter a wireless password if necessary 4 Tap Connect Wi Fi Status Indicators The following icons indicate the Wi Fi connection status A Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and 4 communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP P38 Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an as a av
94. ERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY YOUR CARRIER MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE SUCH AS CUSTOM OS Samsung Telecommunications America STA LLC Headquarters 1301 E Lookout Drive Richardson TX 75082 Customer Care Center 1000 Klein Rd Plano TX 75074 Toll Free Tel 1 888 987 HELP 4357 Internet Address http www samsung com 9012 Samsung Telecommunications America LLC Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Device For 24 hour information and assistance we offer a new FAQ ARS System Automated Response System at www samsung com us support Nuance VSuite T9 Text Input and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications Inc or its affiliates in the United States and or other countries ACCESS and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co Ltd in Japan and other countries The Bluetooth word mark figure mark stylized B Design and combination mark Bluetooth word mark and B Design are registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG microSD and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association Openwave is a registered Trademark of Openwave Inc Google the Google logo Android the Android logo Google Play Gmail Google Mail Google Maps Google Music Googl
95. EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other person s or entity s Product or Claim and specifically without limitation of the foregoing shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class action The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator whose award may not exceed in form or amount the relief allowed by the applicable law The arbitration shall be conducted according to the American Arbitration Association AAA Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to consumer disputes This arbitration provision is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act The laws of the State of Texas without reference to its choice of laws principles shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision The arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty 309 For any arbitration in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees are 5 000 00 or less Small Claim the arbitrator may if you prevail award your reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs as part of any award but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad fa
96. FDN is enabled Tap FDN list then press l and then tap Add contact or edit the contacts that were stored Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering the PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock Contact customer service for assistance Voicemail You can view your voicemail number from this menu 1 From the Home screen tap Phone 2 Press E and then tap Call settings gt Voicemail service 3 Tap Voice Mail 4 If an additional voicemail service is in use other than Carrier tap Voice settings to now view your selected voicemail number and information Home Screen Mode This application allows you to set your display to the conventional layout of Basic mode or provide an easier user experience for the first time smartphone users using Easy mode 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt a Home screen mode 2 Tap the pull down Dropbox and select one of the following options e Basic mode provides conventional layout for the apps and widgets on your home screens e Easy mode provides easier user experience for first time smartphone users on the home screens 3 Tap Apply and give your device a few seconds to update the device with the new look and feel Changing Your Settings 248 Blocking Mode When Blocking mode is enabled notifications for selected features will be di
97. Google Play Magazines you can subscribe to your favorite magazines and have them available to read on your device at any time or any place 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt B Play Magazines E Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 19 At the Welcome display tap the shop icon C to browse the full catalog Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap Accept Sweep the screen to the left or right to view Categories Featured Top Selling and New Arrivals Tap a magazine to see more information and subscribe Follow the on screen instructions to subscribe to a magazine Applications and Development 194 Play Movies amp TV This application allows you to connect to the Play Store download a movie and then watch it instantly Learn more about Google Play Movies at http play qoogle com about movies m From the Home screen tap F Apps gt a Play Movies amp TV A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list For more information refer to Play Movies amp TV on page 160 Play Music Also known as Google Music allows you to browse shop and playback songs purchased from the Play Store The music you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library and instantly ready to play or download m From the Home screen tap see Apps gt ww Play Music For
98. Help Displays application help information Listening to Music You can listen to music by using your device s built in speakers through a wired headset or through a wireless Bluetooth stereo headset Press the volume keys on the side of the device to activate on screen volume control then touch and drag on the scale to set volume 163 Playing Music 1 From the Home screen tap Jen Apps gt ww Play Music a Tap a song in your library to listen to it or While viewing a list of songs tap P Options next to a song and tap Play While viewing a list of albums artists playlists or genres tap P Options adjacent to the label and tap Play The Now playing screen opens and the song you touched or the first song in the album or playlist starts to play The tracks in the current list play in order until you reach the end of the list unless you choose a repeat option Otherwise playback stops only if you stop it even when you switch applications Note If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the Music application the Now Playing bar appears at the bottom of the screen Displaying the Now Playing Screen Tab Options If you navigate away from the Now playing screen to return There are various options available from the various tabs to the Now playing screen from other Music screens 1 From the Home screen tap oe Apps gt m Tap the name of the current song in the Now Playing Ge
99. Home screen tap Apps gt MobileLife widget i 3 If taken to the Play Store choose Update the application Once the update process is complete the on screen widget is then placed on your screen To install on a screen 1 Locate an empty area on a screen then touch and hold the empty area 2 From the Home screen tap Apps and widgets gt Widgets 3 Select the Mobile Life widget Music Hub Samsung Music Hub makes your device a personal music manager It lets you access buy and download millions of music tracks Access top albums top tracks featured albums and new releases as well as search for tracks albums and artist Enjoy music samples before you download them from your device Note You must be currently logged into your Google account before accessing the Music Hub application m From the Home screen tap aes Apps gt y Music Hub o For more information refer to Music Hub on page 171 Music Player This application allows you to play music files that you have stored on your microSD card You can also create playlists m From the Home screen tap t Apps gt Music Player o For more information refer to Music Player on page 167 My Files This application allows you to manage your sounds images videos bluetooth files Android files and other memory card data in one convenient location This application allows you to launch a file if the associated application is alrea
100. IN THIS AREA a list of places within this category displays Applications and Development 186 187 Press l and select one of the following options e Clear Map allows you to remove all markings and layers from the map e Make available offline allows you to si ore map related information locally on your device and access it even when the device is offline e Settings allows you to select the following additional options Display allows you to enable disable t Bar and Bubble action Offline and cache allows you to set options to pre fe tiles when not using Wi Fi and to clear map tiles Choose from Automatic caching Clear all m or Clear My Places cache Location settings lets you access ai settings he Zoom Button the cache that h s Scale ch map olds the ap titles d configure the location Labs this is a testing ground for experimental features that aren t ready for primetime They may change break or disappear at any time Click on a Lab to enable or disable it What s New provides access to the PI can update the application manually ay Store from wl here you About displays general informati as Version Platform Locale Total Free memory etc Feedback allows you to provide Terms Privacy amp Notices disp Privacy Policy or Legal Notices in on about Google maps such data sent Total data received application feedback ays
101. MA data network connection m From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks gt Network mode Using the 4G Network To confirm you are always using the fastest possible connection the phone has an automatic detection method where it finds both the fastest and most stable connection communication method This device is capable of using either 4G 3G services for this connection Note WCDMA is only available on the 4G network 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks gt Network mode 2 Tap GSM WCDMA Auto mode A check mark displays next to this option to indicate that it is active This is the default mode for this phone Using the 2G EDGE Network If you are not using applications that require the 3G network speed any application that accesses the network or uses a browser using the 2G network saves battery life 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks gt Network mode 2 Tap GSM only A check mark displays next to this option to indicate that it is active Note Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time Using the 3G Network If you are using applications that require the 3G network speed follow these instructions to connect to the 3G network 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Mobile networks
102. MS allows you to change the duration of the image slideshow e Layout bottom only in MMS allows you to change the layout e Add recipients allows you to enter additional recipients to the message e Scheduled message allows you to assign the current message to be sent out at a set date and time e Delete messages allows you to erase either select specific message bubbles or all current messages bubbles e Add to spam nos allows you to tag a number as spam so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam folder e Discard closes the current open message Adding attachments to a message To add an attachment to your message tap 2 Attach and select one of the following options Images allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list to add it to your message e Take picture allows you to temporarily exit the message take a photo with phone s camera and then add it to your message by tapping Save e Video allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list then add it to your message Record video allows you to temporarily exit the message record a video clip using the phone s camera and then add it to your message by tapping Save e Audio allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio list then add it to your message by tapping the circle to the right of the audio so that it turns green then tapping Done Record audio allows you to temporarily exit th
103. Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up to five 5 devices with Media Hub that are also registered to the same account You may choose to remove a device from your account no more than once every 90 days You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you d like You will have the ability to re download the Media Content at a later point in time subject to content re download availability and studio permissions You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you have acquired through the Service e You can use 3G 4G or Wi Fi connectivity in order to download Media Content Unlike purchased Media Content rented Media Content will be viewable on only 1 device in your account Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card e Your Media Content may pause stop or not download in networks where there is a weak signal You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a license acquisition has occurred and b sufficient amount of the Media Content has been buffered e You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24 consecutive hours of start of playback e Stopping pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not extend the available viewing time e In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of more than thirty 30 days or shorter on a title by title basis after the Media Content has been rented g if you begin v
104. Play Music bar 2 Select one of the following tabs and tap CA to access 0r an available option In a single motion touch and drag Music e PLAYLISTS Play Add to queue Rename or Delete notification icon down from the System bar and tap the e RECENT to display the most recently played songs and song title from the Notifications area You can also albums pause and resume playback and skip to the next or e ARTISTS Play Add to queue Add to playlist or Shop for artist previous song in the panel For more information refer e ALBUMS Play Add to queue Add to playlist More by artist or to Notification Bar on page 35 Shop for artist e SONGS Play Add to queue Add to playlist Shop for artist or Delete e GENRES Play or Add to queue Multimedia 164 Options While Playing a Song The Now playing screen contains several buttons that you When you play a song the Now playing screen displays can tap to control the playback of songs albums and There are various options and controls available while a song playlists is playing Tap to go back to the previous song Touch and 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt hold to scan backward through the current song Ge Play Music E 2 Tap an album or song From the Now playing screen press l Menu to display the following options e Equalizer applies selected equalizer features such as FX booster Bass boost and 3D effect e Clear queue clears the curre
105. S SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN OBTAINED BY YOU FROM SAMSUNG OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING THE SOFTWARE OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY SORT FROM SAMSUNG 11 THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS Certain third party applications may be included with or downloaded to this mobile device Samsung makes no representations whatsoever about any of these applications Since Samsung has no control over such applications you acknowledge and agree that Samsung is not responsible for the availability of such applications and is not responsible or liable for any content advertising products services or other materials on or available from such applications You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality performance accuracy and effort is with you It is up to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select to use is free of such items as viruses worms Trojan horses and other items of a destructive nature References on this mobile device to any names marks products or services of any third parties are provided solely as a convenience to you and do not constitute or imply an endorsement sponsorship or recommendation of or affiliation with the third party or its products and services You agree that Sa
106. Tap Not allowed devices list then select the connected devices you would like to not allow 9 Tap Download to then select the destination of any downloaded shared content Choose from USB storage Device or SD card 10 Tap Upload from other devices then select the actions you ll take when you upload content from other devices Choose from either Always accept Always ask or Always reject Kies via Wi Fi 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More settings 2 Tap Kies via Wi Fi gt OK 3 Select a network connection and follow the on screen connection process Refer to the Kies Air process information for more information For more information refer to Kies Air on page 219 Changing Your Settings 240 Call Settings To access the Call settings menu 1 2 From the Home screen tap A Phone Press l and then tap Call settings Configuring General Call Settings Configure the general call settings using this option 1 2 3 241 From the Home screen tap u Phone Press B and then tap Call settings Tap one of the following options e Call rejection allows you to manage your rejection mode and rejection list Auto reject mode sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls or messages Auto reject list provides access to current rejection entries and numbers e Set reject messages allows you to manage both existing rejection messages and create new
107. USB Debugging When enabled allows debugging when the device is attached to a PC by a USB cable 1 From the Home screen press Settings gt Developer options Tap USB debugging to enable or disable the setting When enabled a check mark appears in the check box and then tap Changing Your Settings 280 Allowing Mock Locations Note This feature is used for development purposes only If you are a developer who is testing a GPS applications using this device you can tell the device that the phone is at different GPS locations In other words the phone is allowed to mock the coordinates 1 From the Home screen press amp and then tap Settings gt Developer options Verify the Developer options are active Tap Allow mock locations to enable or disable the setting When enabled a check mark appears in the check box Desktop Backup Password Protect the desktop with a backup password ID 1 281 From the Home screen press B Settings gt Developer options Verify the Developer options are active Tap Desktop backup password and then tap 4 5 In the Settings screen enter the current full backup password the new password for full backups then enter the new password again Tap Set backup password to save the password change Application Options 1 From the Home screen press Settings gt Developer options Verify the Developer options are active Tap Do not keep activities
108. Y NOT APPLY TO YOU SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE AS TO THE QUALITY CAPABILITIES OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT WHETHER SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY CAPABILITIES OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed to create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products No agent employee dealer representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or Claims whether in advertising presentations or otherwise on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited Warranty This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state Warranty Information 308 What is the procedure for resolving disputes ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE CONDITION OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED
109. You acknowledge that the Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the Software including all the applicable export restriction laws and regulations 9 TERMINATION This EULA is effective until terminated Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this EULA Upon termination of this EULA you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies full or partial of the Software 10 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED IN A WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY ACCOMPANYING YOUR DEVICE ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE WHETHER INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE DOWNLOADED OR OTHERWISE OBTAINED IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ON AN AS AVAILABLE BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM SAMSUNG EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY ACCURACY LACK OF VIRUSES QUIET ENJOYMENT NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIE
110. able Tap OK to save the setting From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt More settings In a single motion touch and slide the slider to the left to turn it off then slide it back again IONE to reactivate the feature and re register your device with the T Mobile Network Confirm B Wi Fi Calling Ready displays in the Status Bar Call Functions and Contacts List 68 Launching Wi Fi Calling Note Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access Point 1 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the Displays on the amp screen status bar There is an error in the use or 911 registration of the Wi Fi Calling feature status bar 2 Confirm Rj Wi Fi Calling Ready displays in the Status Bar When Action Then screen status bar T Mobile network and can make Wi Fi calls E Displays onthe You are connected to the Displays onthe The Wi Fi calling feature is E screen status bar jactive and in use within an active call Does not display You are charged normal calling on the screen rate minutes For more status bar information refer to Activating Wi Fi Calling on page 68 69 3 Use the phone Keypad Logs or Contacts list to make a call 4 Go to the dialer and make a call Make sure Wi Fi Calling in use appears during the call In Call Options Your phone provides a number of features that are availab
111. above options may not be displayed when using some Internet account types Microsoft Exchange Email Outlook Your phone also provides access to your company s Outlook Exchange server If your company uses either Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007 you can use this email application to wirelessly synchronize your email Contacts and Calendar information directly with your company s Exchange server 133 Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account 1 From the Home screen tap gt Email 2 If you already have other email account setup e Open an existing email account press and then tap Settings gt Add new account or Enter your Email address and Password information Email address your Outlook work email address e Password typically your network access password case sensitive 3 Tap Show password to display the password as you enter it in the associated field 4 Tap Send email from this account by default to make this your default email account for outbound emails Note If selected the Manual setup button changes to read Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync If activated skip to step 7 5 Tap Next Consult your Network or IT Administrator for further details and support 6 Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync from the add new email account screen Note If prompted with an on screen notification that the connection that the Setup could not finish tap Edit details to continue with a
112. ad the on screen System Manager Application information Note This software collects only diagnostic data from your device so that T Mobile technicians can better troubleshoot issues with your device 13 Select either More Info to read additional information or Close to close the message screen Important Selecting Close only closes the current description screen and does not disable data collection To disable data collection go to Settings gt Backup and reset gt Collect diagnostics and turn off the Allow Diagnostics feature For more information refer to Collect Diagnostics on page 274 14 Go through the on screen tutorial Switching the Device On or Off Once the device has been configured you will not be prompted with setup screens again 1 Press and hold until the device switches on The device searches for your network and after finding it you can make or receive calls Note The display language is preset to English at the factory To change the language use the Language menu For more information refer to Language and Input Settings on page 266 2 Press and hold Power End until the Device options screen appears 3 Tap Power off Restarting the Device 1 Press and hold Power End until the Device options screen appears 2 Tap Restart D Getting Started 18 Locking and Unlocking the Device By default the device screen locks when the backlight turns off m Place your f
113. adphones after exposure to extremely loud noises such as rock concerts that might cause temporary hearing loss Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal e Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort If you experience ringing in your ears hear muffled speech or experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device discontinue use and consult your doctor You can obtain additional information on this subject from the following sources 299 American Academy of Audiology 11730 Plaza American Drive Suite 300 Reston VA 20190 Voice 800 222 2336 Email info audiology org Internet http www audiology org Pages default aspx National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders National Institutes of Health 31 Center Drive MSC 2320 Bethesda MD 20892 2320 Email nidcdinfo nih gov Internet http www nidcd nih gov National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH 395 E Street S W Suite 9200 Patriots Plaza Building Washington DC 20201 Voice 1 800 35 NIOSH 1 800 356 4674 1 800 CDC INFO 1 800 232 4636 Outside the U S 513 533 8328 Email cdcinfo cdc gov Internet http www cdc govw niosh topics noise default htm 1 888 232 6348 TTY Operating Environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is forbidden to
114. age 1 Press l and then tap Message gt K Compose 2 Address and create the message 3 Review your message and tap E 4 Send Creating a Memo During a Call During a call it may be necessary to record information a Note 1 Press E and then tap Memo 2 Use the on screen keyboard to enter the note then tap Save e If desired press 5 and select a new memo background color before saving Call Functions and Contacts List 72 Multi Party calls Making a Multi Party Call A multi party call is a network service that allows multiple people to participate in a multi party or conference call For further details about this service contact T Mobile customer service Setting up a Multi Party Call 1 From the Home screen tap i R 2 Dial the number for the first participant and tap 3 Tap Add call enter the second phone number and tap RA The first caller is placed on hold 4 Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and tap Merge The two calls are now joined into a multi party call and display in the order in which they were called Important A maximum of two callers can be joined to a single multi party line Additional callers participate in a new Multiparty session and are held in conjunction with the previous multiparty call You can swap or place each multi party call on hold 73 Having a Private Conversation With One Participant When you have two participants in a multi party session it
115. ailable open wireless network N Displays when Wi Fi Direct is active and KEA configured for a direct tion t th Ed g or a direct connection to another compatible device in the same direct communication mode PS Displays when Wi Fi Direct is active and Q icati K communicating Displays when Wi Fi is being used as a Mobile HotSpot feature is active and communicating Manually Add a New Network Connection 1 2 From the Wi Fi network screen tap Add Wi Fi network Enter the Network SSID the name of your Wireless Access Point Tap the Security field and select a security option This must match the current security setting on your target WAP Enter your WAP s password if the WAP is secure Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the target WAP No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second time to connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless network The WAP key is required when the device is reset using factory default settings Connections 222 Deactivating Wi Fi Wi Fi Advanced Settings 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap The Wi Fi settings Advanced menu allows you to set up Settings many of the device s Wi Fi services including 2 In a single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the Setting the Wi Fi sleep policy left to turn it off Viewing the device s MAC Address or e Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP Activate and Deactivate Wi Fi from
116. alendar events call status etc You can expand this area to provide more detailed information about the current on screen notification icons 1 Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel 1 Tap a notification entry to open the associat application 2 Clearing Notifications 1 In a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen to reveal the Notification screen 2 Tap Clear The notifications are cleared from the panel Accessing Additional Panel Functions In addition to notifications this panel also provides quick and ready access to five device functions These can be quickly activated or deactivated The following functions can either be activated green or deactivated grey Wi Fi Bluetooth GPS Sound Vibrate Mute Screen rotation Airplane mode Power saving Driving mode or Sync Function Keys Your device comes equipped with four main function keys that can be used on any screen Home Menu and Back Home Key The Home key 9 takes you back to your Home screen 4 of the 7 available screens m Press and hold to launch the Recent apps Task manager screen For more information refer to Accessing Recently Used Applications on page 43 Menu Key The Menu key B activates an available menu function for the current screen or application For more information refer to Home
117. all Setting up 73 Multi party calls 73 Multi Tasking Background Calling 57 Music 190 Volume 250 Music App Adding Songs to Playlists 166 Changing Library View 162 Changing Settings 162 Creating a Playlist 166 Deleting a Playlist 167 Listening 163 Music Application 161 Now Playing Screen 164 Options While Playing 165 Playing 163 Playing a Playlist 166 Searching for Music 162 Tab Options 164 Music Files Removing 171 Transferring 171 Music Hub Making a Purchase 172 328 Music Player Adding Music 169 Creating a Playlist 169 Editing a Playlist 170 Making a Song a Ringtone 168 Options 168 Playing Music 167 Removing Music 170 Settings 168 Using Playlists 169 MusicPlayer 167 N Namecard Sending 104 Sending All 104 Share Via 104 Navigating Application Menus 42 Sub Menus 42 Through Screens 40 Navigation Go Home 192 Network connection Adding a new 222 329 Network Mode 2G Network 235 236 3G Network 236 New applications Downloading 196 Non Play Store Applications 197 Notification Bar 35 Using 35 Notifications Volume 250 0 On Off Switch 18 Operating Environment 300 Organizer Calculator 175 World Clock 180 Other Downloads 182 Other Important Safety Information 304 Out of Office Message 138 Settings 138 Outgoing calls Bluetooth Settings 242 Outlook 129 Overview Home Screen 36 Owner Information 263 P Page Buddy 251 Passwords Make Visible 265 Pause Adding to a Co
118. and Managing a Folder Folders hold items that you want to organize and store together on the workspace To create a new on screen folder ee Ss 49 Press to go to the Home screen Touch and hold an empty area of the screen From the Home screen window tap Folder Enter a new folder name and tap OK Renaming a folder 1 Tap the desired folder you want to rename This opens its contents on an on screen popup window If the folder contains no contents e Tap the folder title bar e Erase the previous name enter a new title for this folder and then tap Done or If the folder currently contains files or apps e Tap the folder to reveal its contents e Tap the grey Folder title bar top of the Folder window until the rename pop up displays e Erase the previous name enter a new title for this folder and then tap Done Deleting a folder 1 Touch and hold a desired folder This unlocks it from its location on the current screen Drag the folder over the Remove tab mW and release it e Managing Wallpapers Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images user taken Live wallpapers animated backgrounds or Wallpaper gallery default phone wallpapers Note Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery power To change the current wallpaper 1 Navigate to any screen Press to go to the Home screen 2 Touch and hold an empty area of the screen 3 From the Home screen wind
119. and address To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1 888 987 4357 If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty you must pay all parts shipping and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty service as some or all of the contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service What are the limits on SAMSUNG s liability THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SAMSUNG S RESPONSIBILITIES AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR WITHOUT LIMITATION COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT LOSS OF USE TIME DATA REPUTATION OPPORTUNITY GOODWILL PROFITS OR SAVINGS INCONVENIENCE INCIDENTAL SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MA
120. answer the phone e The power key ends calls allows you to press the power key to end the current call Auto screen off during calls This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that your phone will know to turn the screen off to save power 1 From the Home screen tap iG Phone 2 Press and then tap Call settings gt Turn off screen during calls to create a checkmark and enable the feature Accessory settings for call 1 From the Home screen tap K Phone 2 Press E and then tap Call settings gt Call accessories 3 The following options are available e Automatic answering configures the device to automatically answer and incoming call when a headset is detected e Automatic answering timer configures the time delay before the device automatically accepts the incoming call e Outgoing call conditions adjusts your Bluetooth headset settings to allow you to make calls even when the device is locked Use extra vol for calls This option allows you to see an extra volume button on the screen during calls 1 From the Home screen tap iG Phone 2 Press E and then tap Call settings gt Extra volume on calls to create a checkmark and enable the feature Configuring Call Forwarding 1 From the Home screen tap i Phone 2 Press and then tap Call settings gt Call forwarding 3 Tap an available option e Always forward incoming calls are re routed to a secondary number that you specify Fo
121. ap Vibration to assign a vibration notification to this event 13 Tap Default reminder time to assign a default time frame for event reminders 14 Tap Notifications while screen is off to display notifications on the full screen while it is turned off 177 15 Tap Quick responses to edit your default quick responses for outbound emails These are default responses similar to those used by text templates 16 Tap Swipe with two fingers to change the way events are displayed when swiped CallerTunes This application allows you to treat your friends to play the hottest hit songs seasonal clips comedy and more while they wait for you to answer the phone You can even customize CallerTunes for specific people special occasions and times of day With CallerTunes you can Assign CallerTunes to play for one or more callers Use Shuffle to randomly play CallerTunes from your collection Create your own CallerTunes Jukeboxes from your CallerTunes collection Assign CallerTunes to play during specific times of day 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Sy CallerTunes a 2 Read the on screen information and tap Accept 3 Follow the on screen instructions Camera Use your 5 0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG format The Camcorder shoots High Definition video in an MP4 format Note A microSD card is no longer necessary before you take pictures or shoot video It is recommended that you co
122. app then touch and hold the selection Pon gt To delete a shortcut 1 Press to go to the Home screen 2 Touch and hold the desired shortcut This unlocks it from its location on the current screen 3 Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab i and release it Adding and Removing Widgets Widgets are self contained applications that can be placed on any screen Unlike shortcuts widgets appear as applications To add a Widget 1 Press Apps gt Widgets tab 2 Scroll across the Widget pages and locate a desired Widget 3 Touch and hold an available Widget until it detaches from the screen 4 While still holding the Widget scroll left or right across the available screens and let go of the Widget to place it on your current screen To remove a Widget 1 Touch and hold a Widget until it unlocks from the current screen 2 Drag the widget over the Remove tab m and release it E e As you place the Widget into the Trash both items turn red e This action doesn t delete the Widget it just removes it from the current screen Understanding Your Device 48 To place a widget onto a different screen 1 Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until the adjacent page appears highlighted and it then snaps onto the new page Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens Creating
123. arch results that are displayed 3 Tap a link to view the website Adding and Deleting Windows To add a new window 1 From your browser window tap Windows gt New window 2 Anew browser window displays Note The number of currently open windows is displayed at the bottom of the Windows screen 3 Scroll across the screen to view the currently active windows and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet window To delete an existing window 1 From your browser window tap Windows 2 Scroll across the available windows and locate your target window 3 Tap S next to the listing to delete the window Going Incognito The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites outside of the normal browsing Pages viewed in this incognito window won t appear within your browser history or search history and no traces such as cookies are left on your device Note Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your device after you exit the incognito mode To add a new incognito window 1 From your browser window tap Windows gt Incognito 2 Anew browser window displays Note The incognito icon appears in the upper left of the new browser window while you are in this mode Connections 208 To exit from the incognito window 1 2 From your browser window tap Windows Scroll across the available windows and locate the incognito window Tap next to the incognito list
124. assign a interval time 3 min 5 min 10 min 15 min or 30 min and nature tone Fairy fountain Birdsong by the lake Sparkling mist The secret forest Serenity or Gentle spring rain e Interval category describes the length of time the alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications snooze time Tone category provides one of several nature sounds that are used as the alarm tone 7 Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm 8 Tap Save to store the new alarm event Turning Off an Alarm m To stop an alarm when it sounds touch and slide Q to any direction Setting the Snooze Feature m To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds touch and slide first be set in the alarm settings to any direction Snooze must Deleting an Existing Alarm 1 From the Home screen tap lt lt Apps gt X Clock _ 2 Touch and hold an on screen alarm event 3 Tap Delete World Clock This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of world 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt X Clock a 2 Tap the World Clock tab 3 Tap Add city then scroll and select the desired city or tap in the search field to locate a city Applications and Development 180 To assign DST settings 1 Locate a desired city from the World Clock list 2 Touch and hold a city and select DST settings Select a DST setting Automatic Off or 1 hour If Daylight Savings Time is selected a sun symbol appears ne
125. at steps 1 to 4 as many times as required Note Place the screen in Landscape mode to reveal additional scientific functions 175 Calendar With the Calendar feature you can consult the calendar by day week or month create events and set an alarm to act as a reminder Google Calendar is built into the phone and synchronizes both new and existing entries between your phone and your online Google account Important You should previously add an account Facebook Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or Google prior to using the Calendar ss 1 From the Home screen tap A Apps gt 31 Calendar Tap Show More to display these tabs e Year displays the Year view e Month displays the Month view e Week displays the Week view e Day displays the Day view e List displays the events in a List view e Task allows you to search for tasks Tap Create event to create a new Calendar event or Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a blue box then press l and select one of the following options e Go to displays a specific date e Delete allows you to delete All events All events before today or an individual event e Search allows you to search within your current events e Syne synchronizes your current calendar events with your available accounts such as Gmail Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync etc e Settings displays a list of configurable settings Creating a Cale
126. ate plan minutes Important If you are not using a new SIM card you will receive an Error ERXX SIM Not Ready message You must be using a new SIM card to use this feature Activating Wi Fi Calling 1 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar e If prompted with an on screen Did you know your phone can make calls over Wi Fi popup tap Learn and follow the remaining on screen instructions Tap Next gt Done From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt More settings Locate the Wi Fi Calling field and in a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on oO If G Missing 911 Address displays in the Status Bar follow these steps to provide 911 an address for emergency situations e Log into my t mobile com e Click on Profile and edit the Edit customer information e Enter your emergency location information and complete the online registration From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Wi Fi Calling 10 Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for use of the Wi Fi Calling feature e Wi Fi Preferred Wi Fi network is preferred over cellular network when making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range e Cellular Network Preferred The cellular network is preferred over a Wi Fi network when making calls e Never use Cellular Network Use only Wi Fi for calls Do not use Cellular Network even if avail
127. ation such as Google Exchange or T Mobile Backup They are all physically separate but are used as a single entity called Contacts Note The label entries below can change and are dependant on the selected destination type ex the Other and Custom might not appear with an Exchange ActiveSync account destination type Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card the maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may 7 Tap the label button to the left of the Phone field and differ scroll through the list to select a category such as 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Contacts Mobile default Home Work Work Fax Home Fax 2 Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed Pager Other Custom or Callback or 8 Enter additional fields as desired Tap the Search field and begin entering the entry s 9 Tap Save to complete and store the new entry name Matching entries are then displayed This or process filters through all of your current account Tap Cancel to delete the current entry Contact entries to only show you the matching entries or 95 In a single motion touch and hold the letter tab area on the right until on screen letters appear then scroll 1 From the Home screen tap through the list You are then taken to that section of 2 Tap a contact name from the list and tap eo Edit the Contacts list Touch the contact entry or Press E and tap Edit Tabs Eug Searc
128. aying Your Phone Number 56 Making aCall 000 56 Ending a Call 000000 57 Making Emergency Calls 58 Dialing Options 00005 59 Answering a Call 00005 60 Managing Reject Calls 61 International Calls 0005 62 Pause Dialing 000000000 63 Wait Dialing 000005 63 Redialing the Last Number 63 Speed Dialing 0 64 Using S Voice 000 cee eee 65 Wi Fi Calling 0 22e eee 66 In Call Options 00005 70 Logs Tab 0c cece eee eee 75 Section 5 Entering Text sses 78 Text Input Methods 78 Selecting the Text Input Method 78 Entering Text Using Swype 79 Using the Samsung Keyboard 85 Samsung Keyboard Settings 88 Using the Google Voice Typing 90 Section 6 Contact ssscssssssssseens 92 ACCOUNTS pcde icre tatdhadada na eni 92 Contacts List 0000000 0c eee 92 Finding a Contact 0 95 Contact List Options 99 Contact Menu Options 100 Contact Entry Options 101 Joining Contact Information 101 Sending aNamecard 104 Copying Contact Information 105 Synchronizing Contacts
129. battery Turn off Automatic application sync Use the Power Saving feature to deactivate some hardware and interface functions Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions have been consuming your battery resources Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications Use the Task Manager feature to end shutdown background applications that are still running These minimized applications can over time cause your device to slow down Turn off any streaming services after use see Running Services Animated wallpapers use processing power memory and more power Change your Live Wallpaper to a non animated Wallpaper gallery or Gallery image Initial Device Configuration Note If prompted to undergo a software update tap Cancel to proceed with the initial configuration of the device 1 Select a language from the associated field English is the default language 2 Tap Start 3 If prompted select an available Wi Fi network and follow the on screen connection process or tap Skip to continue 4 If you have previously created a Samsung account tap Sign in or If this is your first time tap Create new account Follow the on screen setup instructions Tap Skip to continue without creating or signing into the Samsung Account For more information refer to Creating a Samsung Account on page 21 Getting Started 16 5 At the Got Google screen
130. bols 88 Settings 88 269 Symbol Numeric Mode 88 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling 293 Save a Number From Keypad 94 Scan for Nearby Devices 168 Scout 199 Screen Home 36 Navigation 40 Screen Lock Set Up 258 Sounds 251 Screen Lock Pattern Changing 259 Creating 258 331 Deleting 259 Forgot My Pattern 260 Screen Rotation 35 Auto Rotate 251 Screen Timeout 252 Screen Unlock Face and Voice Unlock 258 Face Unlock 257 Swipe 257 Screens Adding and Deleting 44 Customizing 44 Rearranging 45 SD card Communicating With 53 Mounting the 53 Unmounting 54 Search Engine 213 Sending a Namecard 104 Setting an alarm 179 Setting up Voicemail 22 Settings 227 Accessing 227 Browser 211 Contact list 110 Display 29 Enabling the GPS Satellites 256 Enabling Wireless Locations 256 Messaging 123 Wallpaper 50 Setup Initial 16 Severe Alert Disable 126 Share Application Information 47 Shortcuts Adding from Application Screen 47 Adding from Home Screen 48 Deleting from a Screen 48 Managing 47 Primary 38 SIM Card Importing and Exporting 110 Insertion 10 Removal 10 Smart Alarm 180 Smart Practices While Driving 290 Snooze 180 Repeat 179 SNS 108 Social Network Adding Facebook Contacts 108 Resync 109 Social Networking Adding Contacts From 108 Software Update 282 Song Set as 168 Sounds Turn Off All 279 Spam 128 Accessing Your Spam Folder 128 Assigning Manually 126 Assigning Phone Numbers 126 Block Unknown Numbers 127 Block
131. bration sensation as you enter text using the keypad Sound on keypress tums on sounds generated by the Swype application Show helpful tips turns on a flashing indicator for quick help e Auto spacing automatically inserts a space between words When you finish a word just lift your finger or stylus and start the next word Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence e Show complete trace once enabled sets wether or not to display the complete Swype path Pop up on keypress once enabled displays a character above an on screen key while typing e Next word prediction once enabled predicts the next word in your text string based on your current text entries Note If incorrect words are being entered as you type disabled this feature e Reset Swype s dictionary once enabled deletes any words you have added to Swype s dictionary e Version displays the software version information 5 Tap Language Options to activate and select the current text input language Default language is US English e Living language allows you to automatically update Swype with popular new words Tap Accept to continue the process Note To use Swype Connect you must have an active data connection available network or Wi Fi Tap Swype Connect to activate social media personalization and configure data settings e Register now allows you register for the Swype Connect service which allows you
132. broken or show evidence of tampering or iii the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified What are SAMSUNG s obligations During the applicable warranty period provided the Product is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product at SAMSUNG s sole option without charge SAMSUNG may at SAMSUNG s sole option use rebuilt reconditioned or new parts or components when repairing any Product or may replace the Product with a rebuilt reconditioned or new Product Repaired replaced cases pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety 90 days All other repaired replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the 307 remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original Product or for ninety 90 days whichever is longer All replaced Products parts components boards and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG Except to any extent expressly allowed by applicable law transfer or assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited What must you do to obtain warranty service To obtain service under this Limited Warranty you must return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate container for shipping accompanied by the sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase the serial number of the Product and the seller s name
133. ccount terms and conditions and privacy policies There are non Samsung Account applications and services that require your consent to their separate terms and conditions and privacy policies You expressly acknowledge and agree that your use of such applications and services will be subject to the applicable terms and conditions and privacy policies 13 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS OMISSIONS INTERRUPTIONS DEFECTS DELAY IN OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION COMPUTER VIRUS FAILURE TO CONNECT NETWORK CHARGES IN APP PURCHASES AND ALL OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES DAMAGES CAUSES OF ACTION INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER P
134. ce Search manually search for a destination address place name of business or even a type of business Layers allows you to switch map views See previous description 193 Settings provides access to both Power settings Screen dimming and Information Terms privacy amp notices e Exit navigation terminates the application e Help provides on screen help Phone This application provides the ability to make or answering calls access the Contacts list which is used to store contact information m From the Home screen tap Phone For more information refer to Call Functions and Contacts List on page 56 Play Books Formerly known as Google Books this application allows you to read over 3 million ebooks on the go Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Play Books jump right into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free ebooks Personalize the reader to your liking pick up reading where you left off on your phone or computer and settle down with a great book on your Android phone 1 From the Home screen tap ECt Apps gt W Play Books E If prompted tap Turn sync on This synchronizes your books you have previously selected between your Books account and your device Tap to begin searching for both free and paid ebooks Tap the shop icon gt to browse the full catalog Follow the on screen prompts to download the ebook to your device Play Magazines With
135. ce in your current message e Settings to access the Samsung keyboard settings menu Entering Text 86 Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keyboard Al lowercase 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text Displays when the next character is entered in input field to reveal the on screen keyboard lowercase 2 Tap EE to configure the keyboard for ABC mode Initial Uppercase Once in this mode the text input type shows ESS Displays when the first character of each word is a entered as uppercase but all subsequent Note After typing an initial uppercase character the ij key characters are lowercase changes to and all letters that follow are in lower All Uppercase case Displays when all characters will be entered as uppercase characters 3 Enter your text using the on screen keyboard Ifyou make a mistake tap to erase a single character Touch and hold al to erase an entire word By default the first letter of try i italized and th y default the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the 4 Tap EF Send to deliver the message following letters are lowercased After a character is entered the cursor automatically advances to the next space 87 Using SymbollNumeric Mode Samsung Keyboard Settings Use the Symbol Numeric Mode to add numbers symbols 1 or emoticons While in this mode the text mode key displays asci 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field
136. ceable or illegal the other provisions shall continue in full force and effect 050113 Warranty Information 318 Index Numerics 2G Network Using 236 2 Sec Pause Adding 60 3G Network 236 Using 236 411 amp More 174 4G 225 4G Network 235 Using 235 A Accessing Recently used applications 43 Voice mail 23 Accessory 277 Dock Sound 277 Screen Display 277 Accounts and Sync Adding Contacts 108 319 Add 2 Sec Pause 98 Add 2 Sec Pause 63 97 Add to Favorites 113 Adjusting Call volume 70 Airplane Mode 35 Airplane Mode 234 Alarm Deleting an Existing Alarm 180 Setting 179 Turning Off 180 Alarm Tone Set as 168 Alerts Presidential 124 Alerts on Call 241 Allow Diagnostics 18 274 Allowing Mock Locations 281 AMBER Alerts Disable 126 AMBER alerts 124 Answering a call 60 Answering Key Home Key 241 Application cache and data Clearing 198 Application Menus Navigating through 42 Application Screen Customizing View 45 Applications 39 Browser 184 Calculator 175 Camera 178 Email 182 Google Mail 183 Google Maps 185 Hide 39 Memo 188 messaging 188 Sharing with Others 47 Show Hidden 39 Shutting Down 25 Storage Used 255 Using the Camcorder 153 Using the Camera 145 Video Player 202 Voice Recorder 202 Yelp 204 YouTube 204 Applications and Development 174 Applications settings allow mock locations 280 Apps Adding 38 Area Code Auto Assign 246 Audio Output Mode 277 Auto Redial 246 Auto Reject Co
137. check mark or tap it again to deactivate the feature Off is the default setting Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings 1 From the Home screen tap K Phone 2 Press amp and then tap Call settings gt Additional settings 3 Tap one of the following options e Caller ID chooses whether your number is displayed when someone answers your outgoing call Choose from Network default Hide number or Show number e Call barring blocks specific types of calls All outgoing calls International calls etc Call waiting notifies you of an incoming call while you are on another call e Auto redial automatically redial the dialed number if it is unable to connect or the call is cut off e Fixed Dialing Numbers manages fixed dialing numbers See description on page 246 e Auto area code allows you to automatically prepend a specific area code to all outbound calls Using Auto Area Code This feature prepends an area code to all outbound calls When enabled the designated prefix is always added before your dialed numbers Ex If you were using 999 as your area code 555 5555 would be dialed as 999 555 5555 1 From the Home screen tap Phone 2 Press E and then tap Call settings gt Additional settings 3 In a single motion drag the slider to the right of the Auto area code field to turn it on JON 4 Tap Auto area code enter a new prefix and then tap OK Fixed Dialing Numbers Fixed Dial Number FDN allow
138. chemicals cleaning solvents or strong detergents to clean the mobile device Wipe it with a soft cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap and water solution If the mobile device has a retractable camera lens do not use soap and water to clean the lens Use a blower or brush or lens cleaning paper dampened in a lens cleaning solution Shock or vibration Do not drop knock or shake the mobile device Rough handling can break internal circuit boards Paint Do not paint the mobile device Paint can clog the device s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper operation Responsible Listening Caution Avoid potential hearing loss Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud sounds over time The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is played louder and for longer durations Prolonged exposure to loud sounds including music is the most common cause of preventable hearing loss Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio devices such as portable music players and cell phones at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise induced hearing loss This includes the use of headphones including headsets earbuds and Bluetooth or other wireless devices Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus a ringing in the ear hypersensitivity to sound and distorted hearing Individual susceptibility to noise induced hearing loss
139. choose either Yes to log into your existing Google account or No to continue e f you selected Yes on the Sign in screen enter your current Google Email and Password information and tap gt Next e Tap OK to agree to the Google legal agreements e If prompted to enable purchases tap Set up credit card and enter your credit card information and click Save e Click Skip to continue without entering this information 6 If you indicated that you did not have a current Google account then at the Make it Google screen choose either Get an account to create a new account or Not now to continue 7 Select deselect the desired Google location services and tap Co Next Note Enabling Google location services can drain battery power 17 10 11 12 If prompted with the Swype configuration screen tap Continue and select either Skip to continue without setup or Register to proceed Follow the on screen instructions For more information refer to Swype Settings on page 79 When prompted personalize your device by entering a First and Last name then tap OG Next This will help to identify this as your device If prompted with an Optional setting tap Enable easy mode setup and follow the on screen instructions to configure your Home screen mode For more information refer to Adjusting the Home Screen Mode on page 46 Tap Finish to complete your configuration process Go through the on screen tutorial Re
140. ck availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of your device If you want to avoid any use of network data for the Update downloads then you should choose the Wi Fi Only option in the Setting Regardless of the option you choose the Automatic Update function downloads Updates only through Wi Fi connection 6 Some features of the Software may require your device to have access to the internet and may be subject to restrictions imposed by your network or internet provider Unless your device is connected to the internet through Wi Fi connection the Software will access through your mobile 313 network which may result in additional charges depending on your payment plan In addition your enjoyment of some features of the Software may be affected by the suitability and performance of your device hardware or data access 7 SOFTWARE TRANSFER You may not transfer this EULA or the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the Software accompanied In such event the transfer must include all of the Software including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades this EULA and you may not retain any copies of the Software The transfer may not be an indirect transfer such as a consignment Prior to the transfer the end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA terms 8 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS
141. creen tap EREE Apps gt Music Player 2 Tap the All tab 3 Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the on screen context menu 4 Tap Set as gt Phone ringtone Music Player Options The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the background sound effects and how the music menu displays m With the music player application displayed and playing a song press and select one of the following options e Add to quick list adds the current music file to the Quick list e Via Bluetooth plays the music through a Bluetooth stereo headset e Share via shares a music file via Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct e Add to playlist allows you to add the current music file to a selected playlist e Set as sets this song as a Phone ringtone Caller ringtone or Alarm tone e Scan for nearby devices allows you to look for DLNA compliant devices used to control streaming media e Settings allows you to set the SoundAlive Play speed Music menu Lyrics and Music auto off settings e Details displays details about the selected music e End closes the application Music Player Settings The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for the music player such as whether you want the music to play in the background sound effects and how the music menu displays 1 From the Home screen tap Eee Ap
142. d 1 Locate the microSD card slot on the side of the device and carefully remove the microSD card slot cover 2 Orient the card with the gold strips facing down 3 Firmly press the card into the slot and make sure that it catches with the push click insertion For more information on how to use the SD card see Using the SD Card on page 52 4 Place the cover securely back over the slot Getting Started 12 Removing the microSD Memory Card 1 Locate the microSD card slot on the side of the device and carefully remove the microSD card slot cover 2 Firmly press the card into the slot and release it The card should pop partially out of the slot 3 Remove the card from the slot 4 Place the cover securely back over the slot Charging the Battery Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li ion battery A wall charger which is used for charging the battery is included with your phone Use only approved batteries and chargers Ask your local Samsung dealer for further details Before using your device for the first time you must fully charge the battery A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately 4 hours 13 Charging Head USB Cable Note Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall charger If both the wall charger is connected and the battery is not installed the handset will power cycle continuously and prevent proper operation Failure to unplug the wall charger before you r
143. d Home location When prompted initially to setup a home address enter the location into the Enter an address field and tap Save e Map enables the on screen real time map functionality Navigation Map options Once on the map screen you can access the following features e Destination returns you to the previous Navigation options screen Search by voice Speak your destination instead of typing Layers allows you to switch map views e Traffic view available only in selected areas Real time traffic conditions are displayed over roads as color coded lines Each color represents how fast the traffic is moving Applications and Development 192 Satellite Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth Satellite images are not real time Google Earth acquires the best imagery available most of which is approximately one to three years old e Parking displays parking information relative to your current location e Gas stations displays gas station location relative to your current location e ATMs amp banks displays ATM and Bank locations relative to your current location e Restaurants displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to your current location While on the map screen press l to access additional options e Set destination returns you to the navigation options screen where you can access a destination by either Speaking Typing or selecting from a Contacts entry or Starred Pla
144. d tap and repeat the phrase four times Once complete tap Done Setting an Unlock Pattern Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the phone When you enable the User visible pattern field you will draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to unlock the phone s buttons or touch screen When you activate the User tactile feedback field you feel vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern The feature is now paired with a backup PIN code that acts as a backup to the pattern lock If you forget your pattern you can regain access to the device by entering a PIN code Note Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated 1 2 3 4 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Lock screen Tap Screen lock gt Pattern Read the instructions then tap Next Draw your pattern by touching your first on screen point Then without removing your finger from the screen drag your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line overlaps each point and they are highlighted with a green circle Changing Your Settings 258 5 When you have connected at least four dots in a Changing the Screen Lock Pattern vertical horizontal or diagonal direction lift your finger This feature allows you to change the previously stored from the screen and tap Continue unlock pattern and update it if necessary This process is 6 Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then similar to changing
145. d an item to your album Tap Menu and use one of the available options Music Hub Home My Stuff Personal Settings Manage CallerTunes or Help Making a Purchase You can use Music Hub to buy albums or individual tracks You can also build your own album from various tracks 1 From the Home screen tap lt lt Apps gt Music Hub E Select an on screen option such as MP3 e Choose from any of the following options MP3s Ringtones CallerTunes New Releases Most popular or Special Offers Select a song from one of the available on screen categories To the left of the entry tap gt Preview to hear a 30 second preview of the current selection or To the far right of the entry tap Buy gt Confirm and follow the on screen instructions to complete your purchase Multimedia 172 T Mobile TV T Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and Video on Demand 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt ahaa tele T Mobile TV The T Mobile Terms and Conditions page displays Note A data plan is required to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details 2 Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions Tap Exit to close the application Note T Mobile TV must be initialized over a cellular network before it can be used During this initial registration process any current Wi Fi connections must be disabled
146. d on the Phone For more information refer to Camera Options on page 146 Self portrait Focus area Camera Camcorder Storage Charge mode Flash Settings Shooting Effects mode button Image viewer Camera Camcorder Camera Options Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen The following shortcuts are available for the camera Note The options disappear after a few seconds Tap the screen to display the tab then touch the tab to view these options B O M Focus area displays the area of the image used as the main focus area Self portrait allows you to set the front camera so you can take pictures of yourself or video chat Flash allows you to set the flash options to Off On or Auto flash Shooting mode allows you to set the shooting mode to one of the following e Single shot takes a single photo and view it before returning to the shooting mode Continuous when activated a continuous series of pictures are taken Turn Best photo option either on or off Select the best images and tap Done Panorama takes a landscape photo by taking an initial photo and then adding additional images to itself The guide box lets you view the area where the second part of the panoramic picture should fall within Buddy photo share uses face recognition from pictures in your contacts to send your friends or family pictures of themselves Smile shot the camera focuse
147. d then tap Settings and then navigate to the Accounts area 2 Tap the account name 3 Tap the account name 4 Tap Sync now to synchronize your account or tap Sync all to synchronize all your accounts Tap Cancel sync to stop the synchronization 5 Tap Settings to access your account settings Motion Settings This feature allows you to assign specific functions to certain phone actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and gyroscope To activate motion 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Motion 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Motion slider to the right to turn it on Note If Motion activation is not enabled all motion services are greyed out and disabled To activate different motion functions m Tap the desired on screen motion option e Shake to update Once enabled shake your device to rescan for Bluetooth devices rescan for Wi Fi devices Refresh a Web page etc e Turn over to mute pause Once enabled mute incoming calls and any playing sounds by turning the device over display down on a surface This is the opposite of the pickup to be notified gesture For more information refer to Using Gestures on page 41 Changing Your Settings 276 Accessory This menu allows you to assign external speakers when the device is docked 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Accessory 2 Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or removing th
148. date after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software to improve the Software and ultimately enhance your user experience with your device This EULA applies to all and any component of the Update that Samsung may provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software unless we provide other terms along with such Update To use Software provided through Update you must first be licensed for the Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the Update After the Update you may no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your Update eligibility The updated Software version may add new functions and in some limited cases may delete existing functions Warranty Information 312 While the Update will be generally available in some limited circumstances the Software updates will only be offered by your network carrier and such Software updates will be governed by your contractual relationship with your network carrier With the Automatic Update function enabled as in the default setting in the System Update menu in the Setting your device downloads some Updates automatically from time to time Your device will however ask for your consent before installing any Update If you choose to disable the Automatic Update function then you can check the availability of new Updates by clicking on the Check Update menu in the Setting We recommend that you che
149. details for entry Note Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account information 3 Tap the Connections area Press l and then tap Separate contact 4 Tap next to the entry you want to unjoin and select OK The contacts are unjoined or separated and no longer display in the merged record screen Both contacts now go back to being separately displayed 103 Marking a Contact as Default When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other messaging type applications the application needs to know which information is primary default in a contact entry list For example when you say Call John Smith if you have three phone records for John Smith the Voice dialer is looking for the default number or entry The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to use as the default This comes in handy when you have multiple entries for the same person 1 From the Home screen tap EJ 2 Tap a Contact entry 3 Press B and then tap Mark as default The Mark as default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact name phone number or other contact information 4 Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want to be the primary information such as name phone number or email and select Done Note If there are multiple phone numbers assigned to an entry assigning one as the default will automatically dial that number when the contact is selec
150. device Understanding Your Device 28 Back View The following illustration shows the external elements of your device Flash is used to take photos in low light conditions SIM Card internal provides cellular service Camera lens is used to take photos External speaker allows you to hear ringers music and other sounds offered by your phone 1 2 3 4 29 Device Display Your display provides information about the device s status and is the interface to manage features It indicates your connection status signal strength battery status and time Icons display at the top of the device when an incoming call or message is received and also alerts you at a specified time when an alarm was set The screen also displays notifications and Application or shortcut bar with five primary shortcuts Phone Contacts Messaging Internet and Applications Display settings In this menu you can change various settings for the wallpaper brightness backlight etc m From the Home screen tap shee Apps gt O Settings gt Display For more information refer to Display Settings on page 251 Status Bar The Status Bar shows information about the connection status signal strength battery level and time and displays notifications about incoming messages calls and other actions This list identifies the icons you see on your display screen Indicator Icons This list identifies the symbols you ll see
151. ds of the clip Press l and then tap Share via Select either individual videos or tap Select all Click Done to complete the process or Cancel to quit Select a sharing option Choose from Bluetooth Email Gmail Google Messaging Picasa Wi Fi Direct and YouTube PEEN Media Hub Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV content With hundreds of titles available entertaining your family on the go was never easier You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch from any location Featuring the stunning viewing quality Samsung is known for Samsung Media Hub is your gateway to mobile video like you ve never experienced it before You must have the Samsung Account application installed and registered prior to using Media Hub Note Media Hub usage is based on service availability Important You must be using an active Wi Fi 4G connection to preview and download a media file The internal memory acts as a storage location for your downloaded rental or purchase Creating a New Media Hub Account Before you can rent or buy media you must first create an account Enter the required information 1 Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung account 2 From the Home screen tap pa Apps gt Media Hub 3 If prompted read the Terms and Conditions screen and tap the I agree to the Terms and Conditions check box 4 Tap Accept to continue or Decline to exit The Media Hub screen di
152. dy on your phone ex MP4 m From the Home screen tap t Apps gt E y Files Note Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders subfolders etc Note The application lets you view supported image files and text files on both your internal storage and microSD card Applications and Development 190 Opening and Navigating within Files DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the device These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt B vy Files 2 Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your selected file e Home tab A allows you to back up to the root directory e Up tab allows you to back up into a higher directory e Press and then tap View by to change the way the files are displayed on screen Choose from List List and details or Thumbnail Press l for these additional options Select all Create folder Search View by Sort by and Settings 3 Once you have located your file tap the file name to launch the associated application 191 Navigation Google Maps Navigation Beta is an internet connected turn by turn GPS navigation system with voice guidance Caution Traffic data is not real time and directions may be wrong dangerous prohibited or involve ferries Important To receive better GPS signals avoid using your device in the following conditions inside a bu
153. e accessed online on the FCC s website through http transition fcc gov oet rfsafety sar html To find information that pertains to a particular model phone this site uses the phone FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case of the phone Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the number Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular phone follow the instructions on the website and it should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone Additional 289 SAR information can also be obtained at http www fcc gov encyclopedia specific absorption rate sar cellular telephones FCC Part 15 Information to User Pursuant to part 15 21 of the FCC Rules you are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung could void your authority to operate the device This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency ener
154. e Input Methods Current Mode Delete Indicator Settings Entering Text using Different Input Options Although the default text input method with the Samsung keyboard is to use the on screen keys you have other options 2 Changing the Text Input Mode in Keyboard 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard With Samsung keypad as your text entry method Note If you do not see the Voice typing input method button select one Gt es iellow ng tev mode options touch and hold and drag across the icons to select Settings then select it from the available options e Abc to use alphabetic characters from the on screen keyboard In this mode the text mode button displays Pel 123 e Symbol Numeric ye to enter numbers by pressing the From within an active message tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard numbers selecting them on the on screen keyboard In this mode the text mode button displays ENZ There are up to 3 available pages of numeric symbols available Tap Input Methods to use the default Voice typing input method to convert your spoken words to on screen text or Touch and hold methods such as by tapping ZY Note After typing an initial uppercase character tap to toggle capitalization to select from other input e Clipboard to launch the device s clipboard area from where you can select a current clipboard item to pla
155. e Talk Hangouts Picasa YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc Wi Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance Inc Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype Inc 2010 Swype Inc All rights reserved Dynamic Noise Suppression from Audience Your phone is equipped with an advanced voice processing chip that delivers clear mobile calls by suppressing background noise intermittent sounds like a siren or nearby conversation and echoes allowing you to hear and be heard nearly anywhere How Does It Work Based on the intelligence of the human hearing system the technology Captures evaluates and distinguishes all the sound signals surrounding your phone and the person you re speaking with Then isolates the primary voice in conversation and filters out the background noise so the person you re calling hears only your voice without disturbing background noise Dynamically equalizes and adjusts voice volume to optimize your calling experience so you can hear clearly and don t need to speak louder to overcome surrounding noise The noise suppression technology is built in and already enabled in your new mobile phone So it s ready to provide unsurpassed voice clarity with every call Table of Contents Section 1 Getting Started ceeee Understanding this User Manual Battery Cover 22202022 ee eee Batey kirsse d eed aoe balding ed oad Installi
156. e actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum reported value This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network In general the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna the lower the power output of the phone Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC Tests for each model phone are performed in positions and locations e g at the ear and worn on the body as required by the FCC For body worn operation this phone has been tested and meets Health and Safety Information 288 FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a minimum of 1 0cm from the body Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines This device has a FCC ID number A3LSGHT599 Model Number SGH T599 and the specific SAR levels for this device can be found at the following FCC website http www fcc gov oet ea The SAR information for this device can also be found on Samsung s website http www samsung com sar SAR information on this and other model phones can b
157. e email account gt or From the current Email inbox listing press l and then tap Settings gt lt Exchange email account gt and specify the email settings you wish to synchronize e Account name displays the name used by the device to track the account e Signature Lets you attach a customized signature to the bottom of all outgoing emails In a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on CON F Tap the Signature field change the current text and tap Done to save the new signature Default account Assign this account as the default email account used for outgoing messages e Always Cc Bcc myself allows you to include your own email address in either the CC Bcc or None fields Lets you always receive a copy of outgoing emails Forward with attachment Lets you include attachments when forwarding an email e Show images allows you to view embedded images located within the body of the currently displayed email e Auto download attachments allows the device to automatically download email attachments when an active Wi Fi connection is detected This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G network connection Period to sync Email to assign the sync range for your incoming and outgoing email messages between your phone and your external exchange server How many days worth of email messages should the phone and server sy
158. e email to confirm and activate your new account Signing into Your Google Account 1 Launch an application that requires a Google account such as Play Store or Gmail 2 Click Existing 3 Tap the Email and Password fields and enter your information 4 Tap Signin Your device communicates with the Google servers to confirm your information 5 If prompted create a new Gmail username by entering a prefix for your gmail com email address Retrieving your Google Account Password A Google account password is required for Google applications If you misplace or forget your Google Account password follow these instructions to retrieve it 1 From your computer use an Internet browser and navigate to http qoogle com accounts 2 Click on the Can t access your account link 3 Follow the on screen password recovery procedure Getting Started 20 Confirming the Default Image and Video Storage Location Although the device is configured to store new pictures and videos to the Memory card it is a very good idea to confirm this location before using your device Important Too many users can overlook this storage destination until something goes wrong It is recommended that you verify this location or change it before initiating the use of the camera or camcorder features 1 From the Home screen tap Camera 2 From the viewfinder screen tap Settings and scroll down to the Storage entry 3 Tap this entry and se
159. e location SIM card or SD card you can also send namecards via methods such as Bluetooth Email Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct e Merge with Samsung allows you to merge all of your current Contact entries with your active Samsung account If several of your contacts are from other external sources this allows you to back them up or copy them to your Samsung account Tap OK to continue or Cancel to exit Merge with Google allows you to merge all of your current Contact entries with your active Google Gmail account If several of your contacts are from other sources such as Corporate email Internet email Facebook etc this allows you to back them up or copy them to your Gmail account Tap OK to continue or Cancel to exit Accounts allows you to Auto sync app data or add and manage mobile accounts on Samsung account Google LDAP or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync This option also allows you to manually synchronize all of your current contacts with their respective accounts e Speed dial setting allows you to set up speed dialing e Send email allows you to send an email using your Google account e Send message allows you to send a text or picture message e Contacts to display allows you to choose All contacts Phone display contacts stored to your SIM card Samsung account Gmail or only display contacts that are part of a customized list Settings allows you to configure where you save new contac
160. e medical device consult your health care provider For more information see http www fcc gov oet risafety rf fags html Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical devices consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information Switch your mobile device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle 301 Posted Facilities Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices require you to do so Potentially Explosive Environments Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death Users are advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling point service station Users are reminded of the need to observe restrict
161. e message and record an audio clip using the phone s microphone It is then automatically attached to the message Memo allows you to select a current Memo then add it by tapping Done Messages 118 Calendar allows you to add an event from your calendar e Location allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing your location e Contacts allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry then add it to your message by tapping Done Adding Additional Text You can copy text such as names phone numbers and events from your Contacts Calendar or a Memo 1 While composing a message press l gt Add text 2 At the Add text screen select one of the following e Memo allows you to select a current Memo then add it by tapping Done e Calendar allows you to add the name date and time of a calendar event to your message e Location allows you to add an address and the link to the location on Google Maps e Contacts allows you to add the name and phone number of any of your contacts to your message e Text templates allows you to add pre defined phrases and sentences For more information refer to Text Templates on page 128 119 The information is added to your message Viewing Newly Received Messages When you receive a message your phone notifies you by displaying within the Notification area at the top left of your Home screen To read a message 1 Open the Notification Bar and select the message F
162. e phone from the dock 3 Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock speakers when the phone is docked 4 Tap Desk home screen display to display the desk home screen when the phone is docked 277 Date and Time This menu allows you to change the current time and date displayed 1 From the Home screen press El and then tap Settings gt Date and time 2 Tap Automatic data and time to allow the network set the date and time Important Deactivate Automatic data and time to manually set the rest of the options 3 Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the Month Day and Year then tap Set 4 Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons set Hour and Minute Tap PM or AM then tap Set 5 Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network set the time zone information automatically 6 Tap Select time zone then tap a time zone 7 Tap Use 24 hour format If this is not selected the device automatically uses a 12 hour format 8 Tap Select date format and select the date format type Accessibility Settings This service lets you enable and disable downloaded accessibility applications that aid in navigating your Android device such as TalkBack uses synthesized speech to describe the results of actions KickBack provides haptic feedback for actions and SoundBack plays sounds for various actions Also lets you enable use of the power key to end calls 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Setti
163. eate multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile phones m From the Home screen tap Apps gt Messaging E For more information refer to Messages on page 114 Applications and Development 188 Messenger Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation When you get a new conversation in Messenger Google sends an update to your phone 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 19 2 From the Home screen tap iit gt Messenger From the Google application select Messenger For more information refer to Messenger on page 142 Mobile HotSpot Provides access to the Tethering and Mobile HotSpot menu where you can use either the USB tethering or portable HotSpot functionality 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt amp Mobile HotSpot 2 Activate the desired connection method For more information see either USB Tethering on page 224 or Mobile HotSpot on page 225 189 MobileLife Widget Personalizes the best of both the Web and T Mobile services for you Get the latest news weather entertainment and sports updates several times a day along with special offers MobileLife does not have an icon in the app tray You will not be able to launch the widget directly from the installation screen 1 Verify you are logged into your Google account 2 From the
164. ect a buzzing humming or whining noise Some hearing devices are more immune than others to this interference noise and mobile devices also vary in the amount of interference they generate The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing devices Not all mobile devices have been rated Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on the box The ratings are not guarantees Results will vary depending on the user s hearing device and hearing loss If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable to interference you may not be able to use a rated mobile device successfully Trying out the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal needs M Ratings Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled M4 is the better higher of the two ratings M ratings refer to enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not operate in telecoil mode T Ratings Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled T4 Health and Safety Information 302 is the better higher of the two ratings T ratings refer to enabling ind
165. ecurity and will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within their area There is no charge for receiving an Emergency Alert message There are three types of Emergency Alerts e Alerts issued by the President e Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life e AMBER Alerts missing child alert Customers may choose not to receive Extreme Alerts Severe Alerts and AMBER Alerts Important Alerts issued by the President can not be disabled To disable Extreme Severe and AMBER Alerts 1 From the Home screen tap zadi 2 Press l and then tap Settings 3 Scroll to the bottom and select Emergency alerts All alerts are enabled by default checkmark showing 4 Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove the checkmark Assigning Messages as Spam You can now assign either a phone number as spam or use a key term or phrase Any message assigned as spam is automatically placed with your Spam messages folder To assign a phone number from Messages list as spam 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Touch and hold a message with a phone number 3 Select Add to spam nos and tap OK To assign a phone number manually as spam 1 From the Home screen tap h 2 Press l and then tap Settings 3 Locate and activate the Spam settings option e Spam settings when enabled allows you to configure available spam settings such as 4 Tap Register number as spam gt Add new e Register number as spam allows y
166. ed applications or SD card files such as music or photos Note This feature provides an option to format the internal USB storage not the microSD card 3 Tap Reset device gt Delete all 55 Section 4 Call Functions and Contacts List This section describes features and functionality associated with making or answering calls and the Contacts list which is used to store contact information Displaying Your Phone Number m From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt About device gt Status Your phone number displays in the My phone number field Note The device s Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing and then tapping Apps gt Settings Making a Call You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM card or to the phone s memory These entries are referred to as the Contacts list 1 Press and then tap R 2 Enter the phone number and then tap a m If you make a mistake while dialing tap lt a to clear the last digit Touch and hold al to clear the entire sequence Note When you activate the Auto redial option in the Call settings gt Additional settings menu the device automatically redials up to 10 times when the person does not answer the call or is already on the phone provided your call is not sent to voicemail Note If your screen goes black during your interaction with the device Launching Keypad etc you might be accidentally swiping ove
167. ed to Send the following tones tap Yes to dial the remaining digits Redialing the Last Number The device stores the numbers of the calls you ve dialed received or missed if the caller is identified To recall any ofthese numbers 1 From the Home screen tap CY 2 Tap the Logs tab to display the list of recent calls 3 Tap the name number and tap i Speed Dialing Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List you can set up to 99 speed dial entries 2 100 and then dial them easily whenever you want simply by touching the associated numeric key Note Speed dial location 1 must be reserved for Voicemail use Setting Up Speed Dial Entries Important Speed dial location 1 is reserved for Voicemail No other number can be assigned to this slot 1 From the Home screen tap i 2 Press B and then tap Speed dial setting The Speed dial setting screen displays a virtual list of locations with the numbers 2 through 100 3 Tap an unassigned number slot The Select contact screen displays 4 Tap a contact and select a number to assign it to the speed dial location The selected contact number image is displayed in the speed dial number box Changing a Speed Dial Entry Order 1 From the Home screen tap Ka 2 Press E and then tap Speed dial setting Important The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another number cannot be assigned to this slot 3 Press E and then tap Change order
168. eeee 224 Mobile HotSpot 225 Section 11 Changing Your Settings 227 Accessing Settings 227 Wi Fi Settings 00005 227 Bluetooth settings 231 Data Usage 22 eee eee 233 More Settings 4 234 Call Settings 0000e eee 241 Home Screen Mode 248 Blocking Mode 249 Sound Settings 0000 249 Display Settings 251 5 SD Card amp Device Storage 252 Power Saving Mode 252 Battery Usage 0 00005 253 Application Manager 254 Location Services 045 256 Lock Screen 2 2 cence eee eee 257 SOGUIILY o s css teetucte tnd att cules reng 264 Language and Input Settings 266 Back up and Reset 4 273 Add Account 00005 275 Motion Settings 276 ACCESSO ixcesancii ox nate dae bene Gan 277 Date and Time 220 277 Accessibility Settings 278 Developer Options 279 About Device 00000005 282 Section 12 Health and Safety WOPOPPATION iriiria 283 Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals 283 Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information 0 cece eee eee 288 FCC Part 15 Informat
169. ell phones pose a health hazard 283 Dock Sound 277 Downloading New application 196 Downloads 182 Internet Downloads 182 Other Downloads 182 Draft Messages 116 E Easy Mode 46 248 EDGE Network 236 Edit Page 44 Email 129 Changing Signature 132 137 Composing 131 Configuring Settings 131 Creating an Internet Account 129 Internet Email 129 Opening 130 Refreshing Messages 131 Sending 109 Wi Fi Download of Attachments 132 137 Emergency Alert Preview 124 Alerts 124 Emergency Alert Configuration 125 Emergency Alerts 124 AMBER 124 Imminent Extreme 124 Message Settings 124 Severe 124 Emergency Calls 296 Making 58 With SIM 59 Without SIM 58 Emoticons 117 Ending Acall 57 Entering Text 78 Using SWYPE 79 Erasing files from Memory card 54 Exchange Email 133 Account Setup 133 Composing 136 Configuring Settings 137 Deleting Message 136 Opening 135 Refreshing Messages 135 Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals 283 Extra Volume 244 Extreme Alert Disable 126 F Face Unlock 257 258 Facebook Predictive Text 90 270 Swpe Connect 81 268 Sync Calendar 109 Sync Gallery 109 Facial Recognition 257 Factory Data Reset 274 Prior To 273 Factory data reset 55 Favorites Tab 113 FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices 302 FCC Notice and Cautions 304 Fixed Dialing Numbers 246 Flipboard 182 Folder Create 38 Creating and Managing 49 Deleting 49 Renaming 49 324 Font Size 252 Style
170. emove the battery can cause the phone to become damaged Important It is recommended you fully charge the battery before using your device for the first time 1 Locate the Charger Accessory jack 2 Insert the USB cable into the device s Charger Accessory jack 3 Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet The device turns on with the screen locked and indicates both its charge state and percent of charge Warning While the device is charging if the touch screen does not function due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet or unplug the USB cable from the device Note This illustration displays both the correct and incorrect ose feos pees A orientation for connecting the charger If the charger is 4 When charging is finished first unplug the charger s incorrectly connected damage to the accessory port will power plug from the AC wall outlet then disconnect occur therefore voiding the phone s warranty the charger s connector from the phone Getting Started 14 Important If your handset has a touch screen display please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non metallic stylus Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty For more information refer to Standard Limited Warranty on page 306 Low Battery Indica
171. en Brightness on page 252 e Auto rotate screen when enabled the phone automatically switches from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa When this setting is disabled the device displays in portrait mode only e Screen timeout adjusts the delay time before the screen automatically turns off Selections are 15 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes and 30 minutes e Font style sets the fonts used on the LCD display Selections are Default font Choco cooky Cool jazz Helvetica S Rosemary or Get fonts online Tap Get fonts online to download additional fonts e Font size allows you to select which size of font is displayed e Touch key light duration to adjust the light duration of the touch keys e Display battery percentage to activate deactivate the display of battery charge percentage atop the battery icon at the top of the screen Adjusting Screen Brightness This feature configures the LCD Brightness levels 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Display gt Brightness 2 Touch and slide the on screen slider to adjust the level and tap OK SD Card amp Device Storage From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD card see Using the SD Card on page 52 To view the memory allocation for your external SD card m From the Home scree
172. en list touch and hold an on screen message and select an option Add to Contacts allows you to add the sender to either a new or existing Contacts entry e View contact allows you to view the current entry information for the sender e Delete thread deletes the entire message and its bubbles Deleting a single message thread For more information refer to Deleting a single message thread on page 121 e Add to spam nos allows you to tag a number as spam so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam folder 117 Options while composing a message 1 2 From the Home screen tap bad Messaging From within an open message press amp to display additional messaging options e Call places an outgoing call to the sender e Insert smiley allows you to add insert smiley icons images emoticons e Add text allows you to add text items from sources such as Memo Calendar Location Contacts and Text templates e Preview only in MMS allows you to add preview the MMS message prior to delivery e Add to Contacts allows you to add the current entry as a new Contact e View contact reveals the current Contact s overview screen e Add slide converts an SMS message into an MMS Multimedia message and allows you to attach an existing slideshow e Delete slide allows you to remove a previously attached slideshow e Add subject allows you to enter a subject e Duration 5 secs only in M
173. en your device and the remote server e Auto download attachments allows the device to automatically download email attachments when an active Wi Fi connection is detected This process speeds up the process of downloading an emails attachments for offline review by not using a 3G or 4G network connection e Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size allowed to pass through to your phone auto matically without user interaction Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved manual e Auto resend times enables the device to y esend an outgoing email a specified number of times if delivery fails e Sync schedule allows you to control the email sync schedule on both Peak and Off Peak times e Email notifications Activates the email no ification icon to appear within the Notifications area of the s new email Gmail etc is received tatus bar when a Select ringtone Plays a selected ringtone when a new email message is received Mess ages 132 e Vibrate Activates a vibration when a new email message is received e Incoming settings Lets you specify incoming email settings such as User name Password IMAP server Security type Port and IMAP path prefix e Outgoing settings Lets you specify outgoing email settings such as SMTP server Security type Port Require sign in User name or Password Note Some the
174. environments or touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static electricity before inserting the headset Do not store or carry flammable liquids gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the mobile device its parts or accessories Health and Safety Information 304 For vehicles equipped with an air bag remember that an air bag inflates with great force Do not place objects including installed or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area If wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates serious injury could result Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft The use of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to the aircraft s operation Check with appropriate authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft e Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or denial of cell phone services to the offender or legal action or both While using your device leave some lights on in the room and do not hold the screen too close to your eyes Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights while watching videos or playing games for extended periods If you feel any discomfort stop using the device immediately 305 Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries When you repetitively perform actions such
175. er can be found i on the Product box ii on the Product information screen which can be found under Settings iii on a label on the back of the Product beneath the battery if the battery is removable and iv on the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable Alternatively you may opt out by calling 1 888 987 4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the Product and providing the same information These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty Severability If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or unenforceable such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty Precautions for Transfer and Disposal If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the standard methods the data only appears to be removed on a superficial level and it may be possible for someone to retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this sort it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung s Customer Care Center for an Extended File System EFS Clear
176. ered by those closest to your current location 3 Locate and tap one of the listed places Restaurants Cafes Bars Attractions user added searches RECOMMENDATIONS or IN THIS AREA a list of places within this category displays 4 Tap the Maps icon to launch the related maps feature 5 Press l and then tap Add a search The functions adds additional search shortcuts to the places screen Lookout Security Lookout Security provides mobile device specific security features that are coupled with a minimal performance hit Lookout Mobile Security provides key security options that are unique to the mobile market Along with the antivirus and anti malware tech there s a lost and stolen phone locator service an application privacy adviser and a backup service 1 From the Home screen tap t Apps gt S Lookout Security 2 Read the on screen descriptions and tap Activate Lookout to begin your configuration 3 Read the on screen information and if desired tap the associated fields to activate the feature 4 Tap Next Applications and Development 184 Maps Google Maps allow you to track your current location view real time traffic issues and view detailed destination directions There is also a search tool included to help you locate places of interest or a specific address You can view locations on a vector or aerial map or you can view locations at the street level Important Before using Google Maps you
177. ergency Callback screen e Tap to callback 911 with a single tap Touch and slide to return to the Home screen while still remaining in the Emergency calling mode This allows you to access other applications while staying in this mode e Touch and slide to the right to exit this mode Dialing Options When you enter numbers on the Keypad you will see three on screen options From the keypad screen use one of the following options e Voice Mail ea to access your Voice Mail service e Call re to call the entered number Delete lt a to delete digits from the current number To view additional dialing options Answering a Call m After entering a number tap E When somebody calls you the phone rings and displays the e Send message to send the current caller a text message while incoming call image The caller s phone number picture or still maintaining the current call active name if stored in Contacts List displays e Add to Contacts to add the current number to either a new or m At the incoming call screen existing Contacts entry Touch and slide O in any direction to answer the call e S dial setting to access the Speed Dialing menu where peod 9 P p e Touch and slide EG in any direction to reject the call you Can assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry e Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward e Add 2 sec pause to insert a two second pause to enter a and tap a p
178. ersion of this same functionality would be the Mobile AP feature Note You can not mount your device s microSD card to your computer while using the USB tethering feature If additional software or USB drivers are required navigate to http Awww samsung com us support downloads m From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Tethering and Mobile HotSpot For more information refer to USB Tethering on page 224 For more information refer to Mobile HotSpot on page 225 VPN settings The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual Private Networks VPNs Important Before using VPN you must first set up a screen unlock PIN or password Adding a VPN Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to use PPTP L2TP IPSec PSK L2TP IPSec RSA IPSec Xauth PSK IPSec Xauth RSA IPSec Hybrid RSA 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More settings gt VPN 2 If prompted read the screen lock information and follow the on screen steps to setup an unlock PIN or password 3 Tap Add VPN network 4 Inthe form that appears fill in the information provided by your network administrator 5 Tap Save Note Similar setup process can be used for all available VPN types Connecting to a VPN 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt More settings gt VPN 2 Tap the VPN entry you want to connect to 3 E
179. es dents and cosmetic damage unless caused by SAMSUNG c defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen d equipment that has the serial number or the enhancement data code removed defaced damaged altered or made illegible e ordinary wear and tear f defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with accessories products or ancillary peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG g defects or damage resulting from improper testing operation maintenance installation service or adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG h defects or damage resulting from external causes such as Collision with an object fire flooding dirt windstorm lightning earthquake exposure to weather conditions theft blown fuse or improper use of any electrical source i defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception Warranty Information 306 or transmission or viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product or j Product used or purchased outside the United States This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80 of rated capacity or the battery leaks and this Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if i the battery has been charged by a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery ii any of the seals on the battery are
180. ether you wish to Not add or add as a New or Existing number Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event has arrived For more information refer to Calendar on page 175 Displays when an alarm is set For more information refer to Clock on page 179 Displays when the device is in Silent mode All sounds except media and alarms are silenced and Silent mode is set to Vibrate For more information refer to Silent mode via Device Options Screen on page 249 Beeaoa i aN Vi Ko i Displays when the device is in Silent mode All sounds are silenced and Silent mode is set to Mute Displays when data synchronization and application sync is active and synchronization is in progress for Gmail Calendar and Contacts Displays when the Blocking mode feature is active For more information refer to Blocking Mode on page 249 Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and enabled Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active and communicating with an external device Displays when your device is connected being used to control streaming media and is connected to a Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA certified device Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in progress Displays when a file or application download is in progress Understanding Your Device 32 DA DD DA Displays when updates are available for download Displays when a Play Sto
181. ethod gt Google voice typing 2 Speak into the device s microphone and watch your text being entered on screen 3 If the text is incorrect tap DELETE 4 Once you have completed entering your message tap the message field or repeat the process to enter new voice to text words Section 6 Contacts This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List You can save phone numbers to your phone s memory Accounts From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to synchronize send and receive data at any given time or if you want the applications to synchronize automatically After determining how you want the accounts to synchronize indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts list 1 Sign in to your Google account 2 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Add account mam coe From the Home screen tap chee Settings gt Add account 3 Tap an account type to add 4 Follow the on screen instructions The selected account type synchronizes with your Contacts list fal he Apps gt Contacts List Creating a Contact The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your device s built in memory If existing Google and Corporate email accounts have been synchronized to your phone these will be made available to your device during the creation of new entries These new Contacts entries can be assigned or saved to synced
182. ettings on page 245 To answer a new call while you have a call in progress 1 In a single motion touch and slide it in any direction to answer the new incoming call 2 Tap an option from the on screen menu e Putting xxx on hold to place the previous caller on hold while you answer the new incoming call Ending call with xxx to end the previous call and answer the new call Note The new caller appears at the top of the list The previous caller is placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list 3 Tap Swap to switch between the two calls This places the new caller on hold and activates the previous call Call Functions and Contacts List 74 Important The currently active call is displayed with a green background 4 Tap Swap again to switch back Logs Tab The Logs tab is a list of the phone numbers or Contacts entries for calls you placed accepted or missed The Logs tab makes redialing a number fast and easy It is continually updated as your device automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of the list and removes the oldest entries from the bottom of the list The Notification area of the Home screen upper left displays phone notifications status or alerts such as Displays when a call is in progress Displays when a call was missed 75 Accessing the Logs Tab 1 From the Home screen tap i gt Logs tab 2 Tap an entry to view available options Note The Logs tab only records ca
183. ettings Gmail can automatically synchronize with your Gmail account on the web m From the Home screen tap Apps gt Pa Gmail For more information refer to Using Google Mail on page 139 183 Google Use Google Search to search the Web m From the Home screen tap Bs Apps gt g Search and enter the search text Tap on the Google Search bar and say the search information Google Google makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 19 2 From the Home screen tap ae gt s Google For more information refer to Google on page 142 Internet Open the browser to start surfing the Web The browser is fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone m From the Home screen tap Apps gt g Internet gt For more information refer to Web on page 206 Local Local formerly known as Google Places displays company logos on a layer of Google Maps When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business or person find out more information about the business see coupons public responses and more 1 From the Home screen tap lt lt Apps gt Local o 2 Tap Search and then use the Search Maps field to manually enter a desired place or choose from among the various categories Matches are filt
184. ettings 242 Set reject messages 1 From the Home screen tap Phone 2 Press l and then tap Call settings gt Set reject messages 3 Tap to manually add a reject message or Tap one of the pre written messages to be displayed when you want the call to be rejected You can edit the message if desired 4 Tap Save to save the reject message Ringtones and keypad tones 1 From the Home screen tap K Phone 2 Press l and then tap Call settings gt Ringtones and keypad tones 3 Tap Device ringtone select a ringtone and tap OK 4 Tap Device vibration select a vibration type and tap OK 5 Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a checkmark if you want your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming 243 6 Tap Keytones to create a checkmark if you want tones to play when the keypad is pressed Call alert 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap i Phone Press l and then tap Call settings gt Call alert Tap Call vibrations to enable your phone to vibrate when the called party answers the phone Tap Call status tones to set the sound settings during a call then tap OK Tap Alerts on call to turn off alarm and message notifications during a call Call answeringlending 1 2 From the Home screen tap Phone Press l and then tap Call settings gt Call settings gt Answering ending calls Select any of the following options e The home key answers calls allows you to press the Home key to
185. feature You must then manually reject incoming phone calls Tap the Auto reject mode field to configure your automatic rejection settings Rejected calls are routed automatically to your voicemail Choose from All numbers enables the features for all known and unknown numbers including those contacts that are not assigned to the rejection list e Auto reject numbers automatically rejects all entries assigned to the Reject list Blacklist Adding numbers to the rejection list Entries can be added to the list via either the Contacts menu or via the Auto reject list menu The Contacts menu option assigns all numbers for an individual as rejected The Auto reject list allows to assign individual numbers To assign multiple numbers as rejected via Contacts 1 From the Home screen tap Contacts 2 Locate an entry and tap it to open the Contact Overview Screen page 101 3 Press and then tap Add to reject list All phone numbers associated with this entry are then added to the reject list To assign single number as rejected via Auto reject list 1 From the Home screen tap is 2 Press and then tap Call settings gt Call rejection gt Auto reject list 3 Tap Create and either enter the phone number or select a Contact from your Logs or Contacts list 4 Tap Save to complete the assignment International Calls 1 2 From the Home screen tap i and then touch and hold 0 until the device shows
186. firm disconnection Note Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device Deleting a device from your list removes its connection record and upon reconnection would require that you re enter all the previous pairing information 1 Verify Bluetooth is active 2 From the Bluetooth settings page tap EJ gt Unpair to delete the paired device Settings 217 Sending Contacts via Bluetooth Depending on your paired devices settings and capabilities you may be able to send pictures Contact information or other items using a Bluetooth connection Note Prior to using this feature Bluetooth must first be enabled on both your phone and the external device and the recipient s device must be visible 1 Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible 2 From the Home screen tap T Contacts 3 Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the on screen context menu 4 Tap Share namecard via gt Bluetooth and select a paired external Bluetooth device Note The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for the pairing to be successful 5 A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications list Enable Downloading for Web PC Connections Applications You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data cable using various USB connection
187. ge Tap the Text to speech output field to configure the text to speech configuration parameters Tap the Enhance web accessibility field to allow apps to install scripts from Google that make their Web content more accessible Tap the Mono audio field to enable stereo audio to be compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a single earbud earphone Tap the Turn off all sounds field to mute every sound made by the device during taps selections notifications etc Tap the Tap and hold delay field to select a time interval for this action Choose from Short Medium or Long Developer Options Use the Developer options to set options for application development Important These features are used for development purposes only 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Developer options 2 The following options are available e Desktop backup password Allows you to protect your desktop with a backup password ID Stay awake with the Stay awake option enabled your screen will never sleep while you are charging the device e Protect SD card Requires apps to ask your permission before accessing data on your SD card e USB debugging Allows debugging when the device is attached to a PC by a USB cable e Allow mock locations Used by developers when developing location based applications e Select app to be debugged Allows developers to select a specific app to debug e Wait for debugger Spec
188. ging Wi Fi Direct e Copy link URL Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a message e Delete bookmark Allows you to delete a bookmark For more information refer to Deleting Bookmarks on page 210 e Set as homepage Sets the bookmark to your new homepage Adding Bookmarks 1 2 From the Home webpage tap gt Add bookmark Use the on screen keypad to enter the name of the bookmark and the URL Tap the Location field to assign a folder location Home is the default Select a storage location for your new bookmark Tap Save The new save page now appears on the Bookmarks page Editing Bookmarks 1 From the Bookmarks page touch and hold the bookmark you want to edit Tap Edit bookmark Use the on screen keypad to edit the name of the bookmark or the URL Tap the Location field to assign a new folder location Home is the default Tap Save or Cancel to exit the operation Deleting Bookmarks 1 2 3 From the Bookmarks page touch and hold the bookmark you want to delete Tap Delete bookmark At the confirmation window tap OK Emptying the Cookies A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during navigation In addition to containing some site specific information a cookie can also contain some personal information such as a username and password which might pose a security risk if not properly managed You can clear these cookies from your phone at any time 1
189. gt Language and input or From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select z Choose input method gt Set up input methods 2 Tap Fey adjacent to the Google voice typing field 271 Select a language by tapping Choose input languages area Remove the check mark from the Automatic field This allows you to select additional languages Select the desired languages Activate Block offensive words to block recognition of known offensive words or language A green check mark indicates the feature is active Tap Download offline speech recognition to enable speech recognition via locally stored files so that even if you are not connected to a network you can still use the service Configuring Voice Input Recognition This feature allows the device to correctly recognize verbal input 1 From the Home screen press amp and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Voice search 2 Configure the available options to alter the settings associated with this feature 3 Tap Voice search to configure the following e Language Choose a language for your voice input e Speech output Sets whether you will use speech output always or only when using hands free e Block offensive words Enable or disable blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of your voice input Google searches e Hotword detection Enable to being able
190. gy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS PLAN alerts are available while in the provider s coverage area If you travel outside your provider s coverage area wireless emergency alerts may not be available For more information please contact your wireless provider Smart Practices While Driving On the Road Off the Phone The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of his or her vehicle Responsible drivers under
191. h ee Touch and hold a Contacts entry from the main contacts Contacts Contacts list and then tap Edit Tabbed Navigation Contacts E _ Context Menu Sheri Displaying 8 contacts Contacts 96 3 Edit the contact information then e Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or Tap Cancel to delete the current entry Adding a Number to an Existing Contact 1 From the Home screen tap EJ 2 Touch and hold an entry and select Edit to reveal the Contact entry s details screen 3 Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number e Tap on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously entered phone number e Tap to enter an additional phone number e Tap to remove a previously entered phone number 97 Contact Details Screen Enter additional information such as Groups Ringtone Message alert or tap Vibration pattern to input additional category information e Add another field contains the following options Phonetic name Organization Email IM Address Notes Nickname Website Internet call Events or Relationship e Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and categories Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or Tap Cancel to delete the current entry Adding a Pause or Wait to a New Contact 1 From the Home screen tap K and use the on screen keypad to enter a new phone number Press l and then tap Add 2 sec pause This feature adds an automatic
192. h to cause ionization of atoms and molecules Therefore RF energy is a type of non ionizing radiation Other types of non ionizing radiation include visible light infrared radiation heat and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies While RF energy does not ionize particles large amounts can increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage Two areas of the body the eyes and the testes are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat Research Results to Date Is there a connection between RF and certain health problems The results of most studies conducted to date say no In addition attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have shown a connection have failed The scientific community at large therefore believes that the weight of scientific evidence does not show an association between exposure to Radio Frequency RF from cell phones and adverse health outcomes Still the scientific community has supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge Some of these studies are described below Interphone Study Interphone is a large international study designed to determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer A report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology June 2010 compared cell phone usage for more than 5 000 people with brain tumors glioma and meningioma a
193. hat the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see before following them All users should pay attention to road conditions closures traffic and all other factors that may impact safe driving or walking Always obey posted road signs Emergency Calls This mobile device like any wireless mobile device operates using radio signals wireless and landline networks as well as user programmed functions which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions areas or circumstances Therefore you should never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential communications medical emergencies for example Before traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas plan an alternate method of contacting emergency services personnel Remember to make or receive any calls the mobile device must be switched on and in a service area with adequate signal strength Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile device networks or when certain network services and or mobile device features are in use Check with local service providers To make an emergency call 1 If the mobile device is not on switch it on 2 From the Home screen tap i Health and Safety Information 296 3 Key in the emergency number for your present location for example 911 or other official emergency number then tap Raa Emergency numbers vary by location If certain features are in use call blocking for example you may fi
194. he prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to end the process Deleting a single message bubble 1 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap Se Open a message to reveal the message string Touch and hold a message bubble then select Delete message At the prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit Deleting multiple message bubbles 1 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap Open a message to reveal the message string Press l and then tap Delete messages Place a check mark on the individual bubbles targeted for deletion or choose Select all Tap Delete to erase or Cancel to exit Message Search You can search through your messages by using the Message Search feature 1 From the Home screen tap vad 2 Press E and then tap Search 3 Use the on screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which to search then tap 4 All messages that contain the entered search string display Messages 122 Messaging Settings To configure the settings for text messages multimedia messages Voice mails and Push messages 1 From the Home screen tap YP 2 Press l and then tap Settings The following Messaging settings are available Display e Bubble style allows you to choose from several bubble styles for your messages Bubbles are the rounded boxes that surround each message e Background style allows you to choose from several background styles for your messages e Use the volume key allows you to change the text size by
195. he selected language e Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode This must be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings Touch and hold to access the advanced settings e T9 Trace like using Swipe allows you to enter text by sliding your fingers across the on screen keyboard This feature is optimized for use with the on screen QWERTY keyboard e Advanced provides additional features such as Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the first word in each sentence standard English style Auto spacing automatically inserts spaces between words Auto punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence by tapping the space bar twice when using the on screen QWERTY keyboard Character preview provides an automatic preview of the current character selection within the text string This is helpful when multiple characters are available within one key Key tap sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an on screen key Tutorial launches a brief on screen tutorial covering the main concepts related to the Samsung keyboard e Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their original configuration Using Predictive Text Predictive text system has next letter prediction and regional error correction which compensates for users pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings
196. how 280 TrackPad Configure 272 Transferring Music Files 171 TTS 272 TTY Mode 245 Twitter Personalize Swype 81 268 Predictive Text 90 270 U UL Certified Travel Charger 294 Understanding Your Device 26 Back View 29 Display 29 Features 26 Front View 27 Home 36 Uninstalling Third party applications 198 Unknown Numbers Blocking Messages 127 Unknown Sources 197 Unlock Options 261 Using Face 257 Using Voice 258 Unmounting SD card 54 Usage Battery 253 USB Debugging 219 280 Disabling 53 USB Tethering 224 Activating 224 237 Use GPS Satellites 185 192 256 Use Wireless Networks 185 192 256 Using Favorites Adding Favorites 210 Deleting a Favorite 210 Editing Favorites 210 Vibrate 242 Vibration Device 250 Video Volume 250 Video Player Sharing Videos 157 Videos Default Storage Location 155 Options 150 Voice Input Recognition 271 Voice mail Accessing 23 Accessing from another phone 23 Setting up 22 Voice Search 203 271 Voice Typing 78 Configuring 91 271 Using 91 Voicemail 248 Volume Settings Adjusting 250 VPN Adding 238 Connecting To 238 Deleting 239 Editing 238 Settings 238 VPN Client 203 W Wait 63 97 98 Adding to a Contact 97 Wait dialing 63 Wallpaper Assign Home 38 Home and Lock Screens 50 Wallpapers Assigning from Gallery 150 151 Changing 50 Changing Lock Screen 51 Changing via Settings Menu 50 Managing 50 Warranty Information 306 WCDMA 235 Weather Setting 261 Web 206 Clear Cookie
197. iewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction but do not finish viewing the entire title that rented Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty four 24 consecutive hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond the thirty 30 day rental window e You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub through any output on your mobile phone including All Share a Play Movies amp TV This application allows you to connect to the Play Store download a movie and then watch it instantly Choose from thousands of movies including new releases and HD titles in the Play Store and stream them instantly on your Android device Movies previously rented via the Play Store are automatically added to your My Movies library across your devices Learn more about Google Play Movies at http play google com about movies 1 From the Home screen tap lt lt Apps gt BE Play Movies amp Tv 2 Log on to your Google account if you have not already done so A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays in the Video list 3 Following the on screen instructions for renting and viewing movies 4 Tap the MOVIES tab to view movies you have rented 5 Tap the TV SHOWS tab to view shows you have rented 6 Tap the PERSONAL VIDEOS tab to view movies you have on your device or memory card Multimedia 160 Play Music Also known as Google Music allows you to browse shop
198. ified apps must have debugger attached before executing e Show touches Displays touch interactions on the screen e Show pointer location Highlights the data that was touched on the screen e Show layout boundaries Displays clip bounds margins etc e Show GPU view updates Flashes views inside windows when drawn with GPU Show screen updates Forces areas of the screen to flash as it is updated e Window animation scale Configure the scale for animation ranges from off to 10x e Transition animation scale Configure the scale for transitioning when using animation ranges from off to 10x e Animator duration scale Configure the scale for duration when using animation ranges from off to 10x e Disable hardware overlays Assigns the work of rendering to the GPU e Force GPU rendering Uses a 2D acceleration in applications Strict mode Makes the screen flash when applications perform long operations on the main thread Show CPU usage Screen highlights the current CPU usage GPU rendering profile Allows you to set the adb shell to measure rendering e Enable traces Enables disables on screen tracing based on an available parameter e Do not keep activities Destroys every activity as soon as the application is closed e Limit background processes Sets the number of processes that can run in the background e Show all ANRs Displays a prompt when applications running in the background are not responding
199. iginal Large 70 Medium 30 or Small 10 Once chosen tap OK Once complete tap Ea Send Configuring Email Settings 1 From the Home screen tap Rar gt Email 2 Select an account 3 4 Alter any of the following settings Press and then tap Settings gt lt account gt Account name displays your uniquely created account display name e Your name displays the name used in th outgoing email messages e Signature Lets you attach a customized bottom of all outgoing emails e From field of your signature to the Inasingle motion touch and slide the Signature slider to the right totum it on ON Tap the Signature field change the current text and tap OK to save the new signature e Default account Assign this account as account used for outgoing messages e Always Cc Bcc myself allows you to incl address in either the CC Bcc or None fie receive a copy of outgoing emails e Forward with attachments Lets you inc when forwarding an email e Recent messages adjusts the number o messages shown in the current category he default email ude your own email ds Lets you always ude attachments on screen ist at any one time e Show images allows you to view embedded images located within the body of the currently displayed email e Security options provides access to advanced email security options Sync Email enables automatic email synching betwe
200. ilding or between buildings in a tunnel or underground passage in poor weather around high voltage or electromagnetic fields in a vehicle with tinted windows 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt A Navigation a 2 Read the on screen disclaimer regarding the current release status of the Navigation app and tap Accept Enabling GPS Location 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Location services 2 Tap Use wireless networks allows apps to use data from sources such as Wi Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location 3 Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite 4 Tap Location and Google search to allow Google to use your location data to improve your search results and other services Navigation options 1 From the Home screen tap 858 Apps gt A Navigation The navigation application can be configured from the main screen 2 If prompted read the on screen disclaimer and tap Accept 3 Choose from the following on screen options e Driving Walking Bicycling tap to configure the method of travel Selection of Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams and obstructions e Speak destination allows you to use the voice recognition feature to search for matching locations in your area Type destination allows you to manually enter a destination address via the on screen keypad e Go home allows you to retum to a designate
201. ing or replacing the SIM card make sure the device is switched off To turn the phone off hold down the exam key until the Device options screen displays then tap Power off The SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as your telephone number PIN available optional services and many other features Important The SIM card and its information can be easily damaged by scratching or bending so be careful when handling inserting or removing the card Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small children Some features on your device such as Wi Fi Calling can be unlocked by using an updated SIM card To obtain this new SIM card call or contact T Mobile customer service for more information This card contains the necessary information for identifying and authenticating the user to the IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem If available you can remove the previous SIM and replace it with the new one Installing and Removing the SIM card To install the SIM card 1 Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket until the card clicks into place 2 Make sure that the card s gold contacts face into the device and that the upper left angled corner of the card is positioned as shown To remove the SIM card 1 Remove the battery cover 2 Carefully place your fingernail into the end of the SIM slot and push the card slightly out 3 Carefully slide the SIM card out of the SIM card socket Note If the card is
202. ing to delete this window Using Bookmarks While navigating a website you can bookmark a site to quickly and easily access it at a future time The URLs website addresses of the bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks page From the Bookmarks page you can also view your Most visited websites and view your History 1 209 From the webpage tap Bookmarks The Bookmarks page displays Additional pages include History and Saved pages Press l to display the following options List Thumbnail view Select Thumbnail view default to view a thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed or select List view to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed e Create folder Creates a new folder in which to store new bookmarks e Change order Rearranges the current bookmarks e Move to folder Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected folder e Delete Erases selected bookmarks Tap a bookmark to view the webpage or touch and hold a bookmark for the following options e Open Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark Open in new window Opens the webpage in a new window e Edit bookmark Allows you to edit the name or URL of the bookmark For more information refer to Editing Bookmarks on page 210 e Add shortcut Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked webpage to your phone s Home screen e Share link Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth Email Flipboard Gmail Google Memo Messa
203. inger on the screen and swipe the glass in any of the directions shown unlock the device 257 V Tue Jan 29 i 19 Note You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent unauthorized use of your device For more information refer to Setting up SIM Card Lock on page 264 Creating a New Google Account You should create a Google Account when you first use your device in order to fully utilize the functionality This account provides access to several device features such as Gmail Google Talk and the Google Play Store applications Before you are able to access Google applications you must enter your account information These applications sync between your device and your online Google account To create a new Google Account from your device 1 From the Home screen tap gt 5 Play Store 2 Read the introduction and tap New to begin 3 Follow the on screen instructions to create a Google Account or If this is not the first time you are starting the device tap ne gt Gmail Note If you already have a Google account you only need to sign in To create a new Google Account from the Web 1 From a computer launch a Web browser and navigate to www google com 2 On the main page click Sign in gt Create an account for free 3 Follow the on screen prompts to create your free account 4 Look for an email from Google in the email box you provided and respond to th
204. ings gt Language and input gt Default 2 Select an input method or Tap Set up input methods to alter modify the available input methods Changing Your Settings 266 Swype Settings For more information refer to Enabling and Configuring SWYPE on page 79 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt adjacent to the Swype field 2 Tap How to Swype to view an on screen manual for Swype 3 Tap Gestures to view an on screen reference page related to Gesture usage 4 Tap Preferences to alter these settings e Vibrate on keypress activates a vibration sensation as you enter text using the keypad Sound on keypress tums on sounds generated by the Swype application Show helpful tips turns on a flashing indicator for quick help Auto spacing automatically inserts a space between words When you finish a word just lift your finger or stylus and start the next word Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of a sentence 267 Show complete trace once enabled sets wether or not to display the complete Swype path Pop up on keypress once enabled displays a character above an on screen key while typing Next word prediction once enabled predicts the next word in your text string based on your current text entries Note If incorrect words are being entered as you type disabled this feature Reset Swype s dictionary once enabled
205. ings 38 Overview 36 Home Screen Mode Adjusting 46 Home screens Customizing 44 Homepage Setting New 209 HSPA 225 Icons Description 30 Indicator 30 Status 30 Images Assigning as a Contact icon 152 Assigning as wallpaper 152 Transferring 219 273 Verifying 219 273 Importing and Exporting To SIM card 110 In call Options 70 72 Incognito 208 Create Window 208 Exit Window 209 Indicator icons 30 Information Ticker 261 International Call 62 International Calls Making 62 INternet Set New Homepage 209 Internet 206 Brightness Setting 207 Search 207 Internet Downloads 182 Internet Email 129 IP Address 282 J Joining Contact information 101 K Kies Air Before Using 219 L Language Select 266 LDAP 99 Live Wallpaper Selecting 50 Local 184 Location Settings 187 326 Location and Google Search 185 192 Location and Google Services 256 Lock Pattern If Forgot My Pattern 260 Lock Screen 257 Changing Wallpaper 51 Clock 261 Customizing Shortcuts 262 Dual Clock 261 Options 261 262 Say Wake Up Command 261 Shortcuts 261 Showing Owner Info 263 Ticker 261 Using Shortcuts 262 Viewing Missed Calls 77 Weather 261 Logs 75 Accessing 75 Low battery indicator 15 M Making Emergency Calls 58 327 International Calls 62 New call 56 Managing Applications Clearing Application Cache 254 Uninstalling Third party Applications 254 Market see Play Store 195 Marking contact As a default 103 Media Hub 158 187 Creating a
206. ings are only accessible if the gesture feature is currently active Menu Navigation You can tailor the device s range of functions to fit your needs using both menus and applications Menus sub menus and features are accessed by scrolling through the available on screen menus Your device defaults with seven screens Navigating Through the Application Menus There are four default Application Menu screens available As you add more applications from the Play Store more screens are created to house these new apps 1 Press and then tap Apps The first Application Menu displays e To close the Applications screen press Home 2 Sweep the screen to access the other menus Sub Menu items Understanding Your Device 42 Using Context Menus Accessing Recently Used Applications Context menus also called pop up menus contain options 1 Press and hold to open the recently used that apply to a specific item on the screen They function applications window similarly to menu options that appear when you right click SSS SS your mouse on your desktop computer Note This recent applications screen also provides access to the Task manager m Touch and hold an item on screen to open its context menu 2 A pop up displays the six most recently used applications 3 Tap an icon to open the recent application Context Menu 43 Customizing the Screens You can customize the Home screens panels to display the
207. ion and melody or Briefing 179 6 Tap More to configure additional alarm settings such as volume slider Alarm tone Location alarm Snooze Smart alarm and assign a name To configure additional alarm settings 1 Tap More to access additional alarm settings 2 Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to decrease or increase the alarm volume A sample of the volume level plays 3 Tap the Alarm tone field and either select an available tone or select Add to use locate a sound to use as an alarm ringtone Tap OK to activate the ringtone 4 Move the Location alarm slider to the right to activate the feature where the alarm is only activated when you are located at a previously designated location Use either the on screen map or enter a location and select Done 5 Move the Snooze slider to the right to activate the feature Tap the field to assign a Interval time 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes or 30 minutes and Repeat 1 time 2 times 3 times 5 times and 10 times e Interval indicates the length of time the alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications snooze time Repeat indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are assigned to this alarm How many times will the snooze silence the alarm 6 Move the Smart alarm slider to the right to activate this feature which slowly increases screen brightness and the volume of nature tones to simulate dawn breaking Tap the field to
208. ion to User 289 Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS oonan cia ecg aeingea lt a amp Smart Practices While Driving Battery Use and Safety Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling UL Certified Travel Charger Display Touch Screen GPS amp AGPS 3 isis eeeedaseiwee seeds Emergency Calls 00eeee Care and Maintenance Responsible Listening Operating Environment FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile Device 000005 FCC Notice and Cautions Other Important Safety Information Section 13 Warranty Information Standard Limited Warranty End User License Agreement for Software NOX viiniin Section 1 Getting Started This section explains how to get started with your device by installing and charging the battery installing the SIM card and optional memory card and setting up your voice mail Before using your phone for the first time you ll need to install and charge the battery and install the SIM card The SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as your PIN available optional services and many other features If desired you can also install an SD card to store media for use with your phone Understanding this User Manual The sec
209. ions 175 Calendar Creating an event 176 Settings 176 Sync 176 Call Settings 60 61 Call Alert 241 Call Vibrations 241 Call Answering Ending 241 Call Barring 245 Call Forwarding 242 Configuring 244 Call Functions 56 Answering 60 Background Calling 57 Ending 57 Ending a Call 57 Ending via Status Bar 58 Making a Multi Party Call 73 Pause Dialing 63 Redialing the last number 63 Wait dialing 63 Call Functons Vibrate 242 Call Log Accessing from Notifications 76 Erasing 77 Call Rejection 61 241 Call Settings 241 Additional Settings 245 General 241 Call Status Tones 241 Call Vibrations 241 Call Volume Adjusting 70 Extra Volume 70 Call Waiting 74 245 Caller ID 245 Caller Ringtone Set as 168 CallerTunes Manage 172 Calling Using Wi Fi 66 Calls Auto Reject 241 Making a 56 Multi party 73 Muting 71 Set Accessory Options 242 Camcorder 153 Accessing the Video Folder 156 Options 154 Shooting Video 153 Camera 144 Camera Options 146 Default Storage Location 148 Taking Pictures 145 Care and Maintenance 297 Charging battery 13 ChatON Buddy photo share 150 151 Children and Cell Phones 287 Clearing Application cache and data 198 Clock 261 CMAS 124 125 Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS 290 Configuration Initial 16 Connections Accessing the Internet 206 Contact Copying to microSD Card 106 Copying to SIM Card 105 Creating a New 92 Joining 101 New From Keypad 94 Contact Entry Options 101 Contact
210. ions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots fuel storage and distribution areas chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked They include below deck on boats chemical transfer or storage facilities vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas such as propane or butane areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain dust or metal powders and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas such as propane or butane must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard NFPA 58 For a copy of this standard contact the National Fire Protection Association When your Device is Wet Do not turn on your device if it is wet If your device is already on turn it off and remove the battery immediately if the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery leave it as is Then dry the device with a towel and take it to a service center FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility HAC Regulations for Wireless Devices The U S Federal Communications Commission FCC has established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive hearing devices When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices hearing aids and cochlear implants use wireless mobile devices they may det
211. ired application 3 Tap Uninstall from within the top area of the Application info page 4 Atthe prompt tap OK to uninstall the application Changing Your Settings 254 5 Select a reason for uninstalling the application then Storage Used tap OK This option allows you to view a list on the current tab of Running Services current applications as sorted by size The Running services option allows you to view and control 1 From the Home screen press and then tap currently running services such as Backup Google Talk SNS Settings gt Application manager messaging Swype and more 2 Tap the ALL tab to display all available applications 1 From the Home screen press amp and then tap 3 Press l and then tap Sort by size to change the Settings gt Application manager current list to show items based on the amount of 2 Tap the RUNNING tab to view all currently active and storage they occupy running applications This tab also shows the total RAM being used by these currently active applications 3 Tap a process and select Stop to end the process and stop it from running When you stop the process the service or application will no longer run until you start the process or application again 4 Tap Show cached processes to view additional cached applications Important Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences on the application 255 Location Services The Location services allows you to configure
212. is then displayed Section 5 Entering Text This section describes how to select the desired text input method when entering characters into your phone This section also describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering text Your device comes equipped with an orientation detector that can tell if the phone is being held in an upright Portrait or sideways Landscape orientation This is useful when entering text Your device also provides several on screen keypad text entry options to make the task of text entry that much easier Text Input Methods There are three text input methods available Google voice typing provides a voice to text interface Samsung keyboard an on screen QWERTY keyboard that can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation Swype default is enabled so as you can enter text as you swipe across the on screen keyboard Instead of tapping each key use your finger to trace over each letter of a word The on screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait and landscape mode Selecting the Text Input Method The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two locations Settings Menu m From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Default and select an input method Text Input field 1 From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar d
213. is available within user created playlists Note If a playlist is empty add a song by touching a holding a song name from the main screen to open the context menu Select Add to playlist and choose the playlist 5 Tapa music file or tap Select all to add all the music tracks to this playlist then tap Done Removing Music from a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap EEEE Apps gt Music Player B 2 Tap the Playlists tab 3 Tap the playlist name in which to delete music 4 Touch and hold a song to reveal the on screen context menu 5 Tap Remove Editing a Playlist Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist you can also share delete or rename the playlist Note Only those playlist you have created can be edited Default playlists can not be renamed EE Apps gt reer 1 From the Home screen tap Music Player 2 Tap the Playlists tab 3 Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on screen context menu 4 Tap Edit title 5 Enter a new name for this playlist and tap OK Multimedia 170 Transferring Music Files Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two methods 1 Downloaded to the device from the Play Store Music files are directly stored on your phone 2 Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card For more information refer to Communicating with the SD card on page 53 Rem
214. ith In a Small Claim case you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative facility and arbitrator fees or 50 00 of such fees whichever is less and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees Administrative facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees exceed 5 000 00 Large Claim shall be determined according to AAA rules In a Large Claim case the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party or apportion among the parties reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator s award in any court of competent jurisdiction This arbitration provision also applies to claims against SAMSUNG s employees representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the Product s sale condition or performance You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the Product To opt out you must send notice by e mail to optout sta samsung com with the subject line Arbitration Opt Out You must include in the opt out e mail a your name and address b the date on which the Product was purchased c the Product model name or model number and d the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number as applicable if you have it the IMEI or MEID or Serial Numb
215. l and then tap Accounts Select an exchange email account Tap Inbox gt A Compose Enter the recipient s email address in the To field e If you are sending the email message to several recipients separate the email addresses with a comma You can add as many message recipients as you want Press l and then tap Add Cc Bcc to add additional carbon copy recipients e Use the Ce field to carbon copy additional recipients e Use the Bec field to blind copy additional recipients Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject Tap the email text field and compose your email message e To add an attachment such as image video audio etc tap Attach from the top of the screen and make a category selection e Tap the file you wish to attach Tap to delete the attached file Note If you attach an image to your email you have the option 9 to resize it prior to delivery Choose from Original Large 70 Medium 30 or Small 10 Once chosen tap OK Once complete tap Ex Send Deleting an Exchange Email Message Touch and hold an email from your inbox list and select Delete from the on screen context menu With the email message displayed tap ui Delete Messages 136 Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings 1 137 From the Home screen press El and then tap Settings and then navigate to the Accounts area Tap the Microsoft Exchange account and Settings gt lt Exchang
216. las or give it commands Show my where to find cheap gas mee 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Q S Voice _ 2 Review the Samsung Agreement and tap Confirm to continue 3 Review the Terms of service and tap Agree to continue 4 Navigate through the following on screen tutorial screens by reading the information and tapping Next or tap Skip to continue without reading the information 5 Wake up the application by repeating the phrase Hi Galaxy Note The wake up command phrase can be changed from Hi Galaxy to anything else 6 Tap Speak if the device does not hear you or to give it a command Example 1 want to find the best pizza online e Tap and say Find me the best Pizza This launches an Internet search prompted select the desired Browser Example 2 want to go to Cambridge Tap and say Navigate to Cambridge This launches he Map application and indicates where these are in relation to your current position Wi Fi Calling Wi Fi Calling is a free feature for T Mobile customers using this device with an updated SIM card Wi Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is limited Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes The benefits of Wi Fi Calling include the following e Wi Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your current in home c
217. le for use during a call Recipient Call Extra volume duration enabled Dials the Dials the number number Places call on hold ea Ends the new ca call Activates or Activates or Deactivates Deactivates Bluetooth speakerphone Mutes or Unmutes the call Headset Adjusting the Call Volume During a call use the Volume keys on the left side of the phone to adjust the earpiece volume m Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and the Down volume key to decrease the level or Tap the on screen Extra volume button to increase the incoming call volume even more than by just using the volume keys e Enabled disabled via the Call settings menu Call settings gt Extra volume on calls For more information refer to Configuring General Call Settings on page 241 From the Home screen you can also adjust the ring volume using these keys Call Functions and Contacts List 70 Placing a Call on Hold You can place the current call on hold whenever you want If your network supports this service you can also make another call while a call is in progress To place a call on hold 1 Tap Hold to place the current call on hold 2 Tap Unhold to activate the call that is on hold To make a new call while a call is in progress 1 Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it up in Call history 2 Tap Add call to dial the second call 3 Dial the new phone number and tap AA To switch between
218. lect the desired default storage location for newly taken pictures or videos Choose from Phone or Memory card Note It is recommended that you set the option to Memory card 4 Press SS to return to the Home screen 21 Creating a Samsung Account Just as important as setting up and activating a Google account to help provide access to Play Store etc An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing applications such as Media Hub Note The Samsung account application will manage your access to the previously mentioned applications and there is no longer a need to remember different passwords for each application 1 From the Home screen tap l and then tap Settings gt Add account gt Samsung account 2 If you have previously created a Samsung account tap Sign in or If this is your first time tap Create new account 3 Tap Terms and conditions and Privacy policy to read the legal disclaimers and related information 4 If you agree to the terms place a green check mark in the I accept all the terms above field and tap Agree 5 Enter your the required information and tap Sign up Note You may be prompted to confirm your credentials via email 6 Verify your account via email by accessing the email address provided during setup and following the steps outlined to complete your registration or If you have already setup your email account on the device tap Go to Mailbox and follow the on
219. ler Group 1 From the Home screen tap gt Groups tab 2 Press l and then tap Create 3 Tap the Group name field and use the on screen keypad to enter a new group name For more information refer to Text Input Methods on page 78 4 Tap Group ringtone and select a ringtone for the group Selections are Default Ringtones or Go to My Files 5 Tap Vibration pattern and select a unique vibration pattern to be associated with this group 6 Tap Add member to then select from a list of available contacts tap the contact s you want to add then tap Done 7 Tap Save to store the newly created group 111 Note Some externally maintained group types such as Google can only be managed or updated remotely online vs via the device These external types will not allow editing or deleting members locally via the phone Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group 1 2 3 t From the Home screen tap 2 gt A Tap a group entry gt ol Add group member From the available list of contacts tap the contact s you want to add A check mark displays next to contact entry Tap Done The selected contacts are added to the group Removing an Entry From a Caller Group Pen From the Home screen tap gt A Tap a group entry Press l and then tap Remove member Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group A checkmark displays next to contact entry 5 Tap Done The contacts a
220. less phone is a radio transmitter and receiver It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for Radio Frequency RF energy set by the Federal Communications Commission FCC of the U S Government These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement NCRP and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE In both cases the recommendations were developed by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry government and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF energy The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate SAR The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of watts per kilogram W kg The FCC requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1 6 watts per kilogram 1 6 W kg The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection to the public and to account for any variations in measurements SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level th
221. lication select Messenger 3 Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google or Tap Add account to create another account 4 When prompted configure the Sync contacts parameter Sync contacts or Don t sync and tap Continue 5 When prompted configure the Instant Upload parameters as desired and tap DONE 6 Follow any on screen setup instructions Messages 142 7 At the Messenger screen tap to start a new message 8 In the upper text field enter a name email address or circle 9 Inthe bottom message field enter a message then tap 10 From the Messenger screen tap Learn more for more detailed information 143 Section 8 Multimedia This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your phone including the Camera Camcorder Music Player and how to manage your photos images and sounds You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built in camera functionality Your camera produces photos in JPEG format Important Do not take photos of people without their permission Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with another person s privacy Note An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video since there is already built in storage Assigning the Default Storage Location Important Too many users can overlook this location until something goes wrong It is recommended that
222. ll feature Privacy and security e Clear cache Deletes all currently cached data Tap OK to complete the process e Clear history Clears the browser navigation history Tap OK to complete the process Show security warnings Notifies you if there is a security issue with the current website Remove the check mark to disable this function e Accept cookies Allows sites that require cookies to save and read cookies from your device e Clear all cookie data Deletes all current browser cookie files e Remember form data Allows the device to store data from any previously filled out forms Remove the check mark to disable this function e Clear form data Deletes any stored data from previously filled out forms Tap OK to complete the process e Enable location Allows websites to request access to your location e Clear location access Clears location access for all websites Tap OK to complete the process e Remember passwords Stores usernames and passwords for visited sites Remove the check mark to disable this function e Clear passwords Deletes any previously stored usernames or passwords Tap OK to complete the process e Enable notifications Activates Web notifications e Clear notifications Clears current Web notifications Accessibility e Force zoom Allows you to override a website s zoom setting and forces a zoom view e Text size Allows you to manually adjust the size of the on screen tex
223. ll of the available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device or launch any of the following functions Phone i launches the phone related screen functions Keypad Logs Favorites and Contacts Contacts gy launches the Contacts related screens Phone Groups Favorites and Contacts Messaging we launches the Messaging menu create new messages or open an existing message string Internet launches the built in Web browser Apps launches the Applications page e Tap Apps to access the Application screens e While in the Applications screens tap Back to easily return to the Home screen As you transition from screen to screen a screen indicator located at the bottom displays the currently active panel Home Screen Menu Settings When on the Home screen press l and then select any of the following menu options Add apps and widgets allows you to quickly access the Widget tab where you can then drag a selected widget to an available area on a selected screen e Create folder allows you to create on screen folders to help organize files of application shortcuts Set wallpaper allows you to assign the current wallpaper for the Home screen Lock screen or Home screen and lock screens Choose from Gallery Live wallpapers or Wallpapers Edit page allows you to add or remove extended screens from your device You can have up to six extended screens one Home screen and si
224. llows you to set this option to Auto focus Macro or Face detection Use Auto focus for all other focal situations Timer allows you to set a timer for how long to wait before taking a picture Options include Off 2 sec 5 sec and 10 sec Resolution allows you to set the image size to either 5M 2560x1920 W4M 2560x1536 3 2M 2048x1536 W2 4M 2048x1232 or 0 3M 640x480 Settings continued White balance allows you to set this option to one of the following choices Auto Daylight Cloudy Incandescent or Fluorescent ISO ISO determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital camera Choose from Auto 100 200 or 400 Use a lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light a higher ISO number to take photos with less light or Auto to let the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots Metering allows you to set how the camera measures or meters the light source Matrix Center weighted or Spot Guidelines allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off Shutter sound allows you to set the Shutter sound to On or Off Image quality allows you to set the image quality to Superfine Fine or Normal Settings continued Storage allows you to configure the default storage location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory card if inserted Reset allows you to reset all camera or camcorder settings to the default values Image viewer allows you to access
225. lls that occur while the phone is turned on If a call is received while it is turned off it will not be included in your calling history Each entry contains the phone number if it is available and Contacts entry name if the number is in your Contacts Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device Indicates any received calls that were answered Indicates a missed call Indicates any received calls that were rejected Indicates auto rejected calls A akap Accessing Call log from The Notifications Area 1 3 Locate from the Notifications area of the Status bar Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications panel Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen This list provides easy access to redial an entry or you can also choose to access two types of history entry lists depending on how they are touched Call logs Caller Overview e Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the Call options screen e Create contact to save the number if it is not already in your Contacts e View contact to view the Contact details for the current entry e Update existing to update an existing Contacts entry with the current number e Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number e Send message allows you to create a new text message to the selected entry e Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration
226. mail Flipboard Gmail Google Memo Messaging or Wi Fi Direct The recipient will be notified about the receipt of the new information Managing Shortcuts Note To move a shortcut from one screen to another you must carefully touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the edge of the screen As the shortcut turns light blue you can begin to move it to the adjacent screen lf this does not work delete it from its current screen Activate the new screen and then add the selected shortcut To add a shortcut from the Applications screen 1 2 Press to go to the Home screen Select a screen location for your new shortcut by scrolling across your available screens until you reach the desired one Tap Apps the to reveal all your current available applications By default applications are displayed as an Alphabetical grid Scroll across the screens and locate your desired application Touch and hold the on screen icon The new shortcut then appears to hover over the current screen 6 While still holding the on screen icon position it on the current screen Once complete release the screen to lock the shortcut into its new position To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen Press to go to the Home screen Navigate to a screen with an empty area Touch and hold an empty area of the screen From the Home screen window tap Apps and widgets gt Apps 5 Scroll up or down the list to find your desired
227. mail to optout sta samsung com with the subject line Arbitration Opt Out You must include in the opt out e mail a your name and address b the date on which the device was purchased c the device model name or model number and d the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number as applicable if you have it the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found i on the device box ii on the device information screen which can be found under Settings iii on a label on the back of the device beneath the battery if the battery is removable and iv on the outside of the device if the battery is not removable Alternatively you may opt out by calling 1 888 987 4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of the device and providing the same information These are the only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure Opting out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or its preloaded Software and you will continue to enjoy the benefits of this license 17 ENTIRE AGREEMENT SEVERABILITY This EULA is the entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications proposals and representations with respect to the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA If any provision of this EULA is held to be void invalid unenfor
228. manual update of necessary information 7 When prompted to provide additional detailed information within the Exchange server settings screen enter an updated Domain and confirm your user name and Password information Important Remember to manually place the cursor in the correct spot and enter a Domain name before the Domain user name entry Most servers only provide a username 8 Update or re enter your Exchange server information within the appropriate field This field can often be populated with incorrect or out of date information provided by your server e Exchange Server your exchange server remote email address Typically starts with mail XXX com Obtain this information from your company network administrator Important Do not accept the default entry as this is a guess based on returned information e If your network requires SSL encryption tap the Use secure connection SSL field to place a check mark in the box and activate this additional level Most often this option should be enabled e If your network requires that you accept SSL certificates tap the Accept all SSL certificates field to place a check mark in the box and activate this additional level Most often this option is not required Confirm this information with your IT Administrator Important If your exchange server requires this feature leaving this field unchecked can prevent connection 9 Consult your IT Administrator if
229. mber by going to the left This action addresses either a new text message or Bobsled message to the selected recipient Contact tips Quick Calling Message Options Options before composing a message 1 2 From the Home screen tap gt Messaging Before composing a message press l from the main Messaging screen to display additional messaging options e Search allows you to search through all of your messages for a certain word or string of words Use the on screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in which to search then tap i For more information refer to Message Search on page 122 e Delete threads allows you to delete any message thread Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will appear next to the message Tap Delete For more information refer to Deleting a single message thread on page 121 e Draft messages displays the draft messages folder and its contents e Scheduled messages displays the scheduled messages folder and its contents Messages 116 e Locked messages displays the locked messages folder and its contents Spam messages displays the spam messages folder and its contents e Text templates displays your available text message reply templates For more information refer to Text Templates on page 128 e Settings allows you to access Messaging settings For more information refer to Messaging Settings on page 123 3 From the Messaging scre
230. me screen tap Apps gt Downloads z 2 Tap an available file category tab Internet downloads or Other downloads and select the desired file Email Email enables you to review and create email using most email services The device alerts you when you receive an email message m From the Home screen tap Apps gt Email z For more information refer to Email on page 129 Flipboard This application creates a personalized digital magazine out of everything being shared with you Access news stories personal feeds and other related material Flip through your Facebook newsfeed tweets from your Twitter account photos from friends and much more 1 From the Home screen tap lt lt Apps gt i Fipboare aii 2 Tap Get started select some on screen categories and tap Done to create a new profile or Tap Sign In to log into your previously created profile 3 Follow the on screen instructions Applications and Development 182 Gallery The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos For photos you can also perform basic editing tasks view a slideshow set photos as wallpaper or caller image and share as a picture message m From the Home screen tap Apps gt De Gallery i For more information refer to The Gallery on page 156 Gmail Google Mail Gmail is a web based email service Gmail is configured when you first set up your phone Depending on your synchronization s
231. might be necessary to place one of those participants on hold so that a private conversation can be held with a single caller While you are in a multi party call 1 Tap Manage Note The Manage conference call option is not available for multi party calls created while using the Wi Fi Calling feature You must be on the cellular network to use the manage feature 2 Tap fe adjacent to the participants you would like to split from the current multi line call The list displays the callers in the order they were dialed 3 Tap the participant to which you want to speak privately You can now talk privately to that person while the other participants can continue to converse with each other If there is only one other participant that person is placed on hold 4 To return to the multi party call tap the Merge icon All of the multi party call participants can now hear each other Dropping One Participant 1 Tap Manage gt to the right of the number to drop The participant is disconnected and you can continue the call with the other participant 2 Tap caller to end your conversation with the remaining Call Waiting You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in progress if this service is supported by the network and you have previously set the Call waiting option to Activate You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone For more information refer to Configuring Additional Voice Call S
232. modes Media device MTP allows you to transfer media files in Windows or using an Android file transfer on a Mac Camera PTP allows you to transfer photos using the camera software and transfer any files onto a PC that does not Important Before you can download a web application you must insert an SD into the phone and enable the Unknown sources feature enables downloading For more information refer to Installing the microSD Memory Card on page 12 Also see Mounting the SD Card on page 53 support MTP Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap your phone provided they are both on the same Wi Fi network Settings gt Security gt Unknown sources check box 2 Tap OK to allow install of non Play Store applications Tap again to remove the check mark and disable the installation of non market applications Warning Not all web applications are safe to download In order to protect your phone and data use Play Store to install web applications For more information refer to Downloading a New Google Application on page 196 Connections 218 Prior to using Kies air for Phone Update Before using Kies air to upgrade your device it is recommended that you backup your personal data prior to use To export a Contact list to your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Contacts 2 Press l and then tap Import Export 3 Tap Export t
233. more space for adding icons widgets and other customization features There are six available extended screens panels each of which may be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets These screens share the use of the three Primary Shortcuts The current screen is indicated at the bottom by a white square Up to seven 7 total screens are available 37 Note Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all screens Google search is an on screen Internet search engine powered by Google Tap to access the Voice Search feature where you can verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search Tap Voice Search to launch the Voice Search function from within this Google widget Widgets are self contained on screen applications not shortcuts These can be placed onto any of the available screens Home or extended Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as Camera YouTube Voicemail Contacts Phone Email Play Store etc These function the same as shortcuts on your computer Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens the majority can also be found within the Applications screens The Application screens can be accessed by tapping Apps from the Primary shortcuts area api Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number of times Primary Shortcuts are four shortcuts present throughout a
234. msung shall not be Warranty Information 314 responsible or liable directly or indirectly for any damage or loss including but not limited to any damage to the mobile device or loss of data caused or alleged to be caused by or in connection with use of or reliance on any such third party content products or services available on or through any such application You acknowledge and agree that the use of any third party application is governed by such third party application provider s Terms of Use License Agreement Privacy Policy or other such agreement and that any information or personal data you provide whether knowingly or unknowingly to such third party application provider will be subject to such third party application provider s privacy policy if such a policy exists SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER 12 SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS Certain Samsung applications and services may be included with or downloaded to this mobile device Many of them require Samsung Services 315 membership registration Samsung Account and your rights and obligations will be set forth in separate Samsung A
235. n press l and then tap Settings gt Storage The available memory displays under the Device memory and USB storage headings Power Saving Mode This feature allows you both automatically set the phone to use a power saving mode and configure additional power saving options manually all in an effort to conserve battery power 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Power saving mode 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the slider to the right to turn iton OND Changing Your Settings 252 3 Tap the following options to create a check mark and conserve power e CPU power saving allows you to limit the maximum performance of the CPU Screen power saving allows you to lower the screen power level Tap Learn about Power saving mode to learn about various ways to conserve battery power When the power gets low confirm appears at the top of the screen This indicates the power saving mode is active Battery Usage This option allows you to view a list of those components using battery power The amount of time the battery was used also displays Battery usage displays in percentages per application 1 From the Home screen press I and then tap Settings gt Battery The battery level displays in percentage From the upper right tap Refresh to update the list or Tap an entry to view more detailed information Other applications may be running that affect battery use Application
236. n health concerns The FDA also is working with voluntary standard setting bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE the International Commission on Non lonizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP and others to assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect the public Reducing Exposure Hands Free Kits and Other Accessories Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy RF from cell phones and at this point we do not know that there is it is probably very small But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential risks you can take a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your head and the cell phone Hands Free Kits Hands free kits may include audio or Bluetooth headsets and various types of body worn accessories such as belt clips and holsters Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone is held away from the head in the user s hand or in approved body worn accessories Cell phones marketed in the U S are required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when used against the head and against the body Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones
237. nchronize Choose from Automatic All 1 day 3 days 1 week 2 weeks or 1 month e Empty server trash allows you to delete your email account s trash bin remotely e Sync schedule allows you to configure your email sync schedule e Folder sync settings allows you to configure the sync settings for various folders such as Inbox Drafts Outbox etc Out of office settings allows you to both activate deactivate your email s out of office settings and configure both the start end dates and your outgoing message e Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size allowed to pass through to your phone automatically without user interaction Emails with attachments larger than configured will have to be retrieved manually e Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync calendar events Choose from 2 weeks 1 month 3 months 6 months or All calendar e Security options allows you to enable several security options such as Encryption Encryption algorithm Sign Sign algorithms Email certificates and Security policy list These security policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers Security policy list lists the current email s security policy These policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers e Incase of sync conflict allows you to assign the master source on emails If there is a conflict with the current email sync you can assign the se
238. nd a similar number of healthy controls Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain cancer In this study most people had no increased risk of brain cancer from using cell phones For people with the heaviest use of cell phones an average of more than Y2 hour per day every day for over 10 years the study suggested a slight increase in brain cancer However the authors determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data Additional information about Interphone can be found at http www iarc fr en media centre pr 2010 pdfs pr200_E pdf Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date but it did not answer all questions about cell phone safety Additional research is being conducted around the world and the FDA continues to monitor developments in this field Health and Safety Information 284 International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users COSMOS The COSMOS study aims to conduct long term health monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there are any health issues linked to long term exposure to radio frequency energy from cell phone use The COSMOS study will follow approximately 300 000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to 30 years Additional information about the COSMOS study can be found at http www ukcosmos org index html Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence MOBI KIDS MOBI KIDS is an i
239. nd holding will launch Visual voicemail if it is already active on your device 2 When connected follow the voice prompts from the voice mail center 23 Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone 1 Dial your wireless phone number 2 When you hear your voicemail greeting press the asterisk key on the phone you are using 3 Enter your passcode Visual Voicemail Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a voicemail message and listen to the any message they want without being limited to chronological order 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Visual Voicemail J 2 Read the on screen information and tap Next A list of the voicemail messages displays Note You must subscribe to Visual Voicemail service to use this feature Charges may apply Please contact your service provider for further details 3 Tap an on screen voicemail message to play it back To check Visual Voicemail messages 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Visual Voicemail P Tap the voicemail message you want to play Tap J Pay To delete Visual Voicemail messages 1 Pere i From the Home screen tap t Apps gt Visual Voicemail P Tap the voicemail message you want to delete Tap ii Delete gt OK Task Manager Your device can run applications simultaneously with some applications running in the background Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over
240. nd only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation or modify or disable any features of the Software or create derivative works based on the Software You may not rent lease lend sublicense or provide commercial hosting services with the Software 4 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA You agree that Samsung and its affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as part of the product support services related to the Software provided to you if any such as IMEI your device s unique identification number device number model name customer code access recording your device s current SW version MCC Mobile Country Code MNC Mobile Network Code Samsung and its affiliates may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you At all times your information will be treated in accordance with Samsung s Privacy Policy which can be viewed at http account samsung com membership pp 5 SOFTWARE UPDATES Samsung may provide to you or make available to you updates upgrades supplements and add on components if any of the Software including bug fixes service upgrades parts or whole products or devices and updates and enhancements to any software previously installed including entirely new versions collectively Up
241. ndar Event 1 From the Home screen tap ze Apps gt 31 Calendar 2 Tap to access the various calendar tabs 3 Within the Year Month Week and Day tabs tap Create event Calendar Settings Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which you want the calendar to begin You also select how you want to view the calendar by Month Week or Day or determine how to manage events notifications sounds and defaults reminders 1 From the Home screen tap seas Apps gt 31 2 Press E gt Settings 3 Tap Month view styles and select a style Calendar view list or Calendar view pop up 4 Tap Week view and select a type Timeline or Analog 5 Tap First day of week and select either Local default Saturday Sunday or Monday Applications and Development 176 6 Tap Hide declined events to activate this option A check mark indicates selection 7 Tap Lock time zone to lock event time based on your current user selected time zone Select a time zone from within the Select time zone field 8 Tap Show week number to display the week numbers along the side of the week entries 9 Tap Calendars and select the type of general synchronization settings you want A checkmark indicates selection 10 Tap Set alerts amp notifications to adjust the event notification method Choose from Alert Status bar notification and Off 11 Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event notification 12 T
242. ne is equipped with features that allow you to quickly connect to the Web Web Your phone is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the mobile web This section explains how to navigate the browser and use the basic features Accessing the Internet To access the Browser m From the Home screen tap g Internet faite alata imi mire Apps gt Note You must disable your Wi Fi connection if you wish to view the T Mobile home page http ml t mobile com Navigating with the Browser 1 Tap an entry to select an item 2 Sweep the screen with your finger in an up or down motion to scroll through a website 3 To return to a previous page tap l 4 To move forward to a web page tap gt Browser Options 1 From the top of the browser screen select an available option e Navigation use the forward and back buttons to navigate through your browsing activity e Refresh reloads the current page e Windows displays a list of the windows you have open Bookmarks provides access to the Bookmarks screen or From the home page press to access the following options Connections 206 207 e New window launches a new browser window By default this screen shows the web2go home page e Add bookmark allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list e Add shortcut creates a shortcut to the web2go Home page and then places it on an open area on an available extended screen Share page allows you to sha
243. nfiguration 61 Auto Reject List 241 Auto Reject Mode 241 Auto Sync App Data 99 Automatic Answering 242 Automatic Restore 273 B Back up My Account 273 My Data 273 Backup and Restore 273 Basic Mode 46 248 Battery Charging 13 Display Percentage 15 252 Extending Life 15 Installing 11 Low Battery Indicator 15 Removal 11 Wall Charger 13 Battery Cover Removal 8 Replace 9 Battery Life Extending 15 Battery Usage 253 Battery Use amp Safety 291 Bigger Font Setting 279 Bing Set Search Engine 213 Blacklist Adding 100 Blocking Mode 249 On 249 Bluetooth 231 About 214 Change Name 215 Deleting a Paired Device 217 Device Name 232 Disconnecting a Paired Device 217 Headset Settings Outgoing Calls 242 Off 214 231 On 214 231 Outgoing Headset Condition 244 Paring Devices 216 Review Downloaded Files 215 320 Scan for Devices 215 Scanning for other Devices 232 Sending Contact Information 217 Sending Contacts Via 217 Sending Namecard 105 Set Visibility 215 Settings 214 Status indicators 214 Switching to Headset during call 72 Turning on and off 214 231 Visibility 232 Visible Time Out 215 Browser Adding bookmarks 210 Deleting bookmarks 210 Easier to Read Pages 212 Emptying cookies 210 Entering a URL 207 Inverted Display 212 Navigation 206 Options 206 Quick Controls 214 Search Engine 213 321 Settings 211 Bubble Options 121 Buddy Photo Share 146 Cc Calculator Scientific Funct
244. nfirm your default storage location for images and videos m From the Home screen tap Apps gt Camera For more information refer to Using the Camera on page 145 Chrome The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google Chrome Web browser on your device 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Chrome a 2 Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap Accept and Continue 3 If you have an existing Chrome account tap Sign in to bring your open tabs bookmarks and omnibox data from your computer to your phone otherwise tap No thanks 4 Follow the on screen instructions to use Google Chrome Applications and Development 178 Clock Here you can set an Alarm configure and view the World Clock use a Stopwatch set a Timer or use a Desk Clock The applications display in a tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger m From the Home screen tap Apps gt X Clock es Setting an Alarm 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt X Clock o 2 Tap Create alarm 3 Use the plus or minus symbols to enter the hour and minutes then tap AM or PM toggles depending on which was last selected 4 Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times you want this alarm to repeat Selections are day blocks or Repeat Weekly Selected day blocks turn blue when active 5 Tap the Alarm type field and select one of the following Melody Vibration Vibrat
245. nformation Note Wi Fi connection must be disabled prior to use this application requires use of a T Mobile network connection 1 From the Home screen tap lt lt Apps gt T Mobile My Account 2 Read the on screen information and tap Next Applications and Development 200 3 The application screen provides several available options e Account Info provides access to account specific features such as Notifications e Device Support provides details about your current billing summary e Notifications provides about both your current plan other available plans and other related services e MobileLife FamilyWhere provides links to other T Mobile related information T Mobile Name ID Allows you to modify the on screen Caller ID information Name ID identifies unknown callers by Name City and State 1 From the Home screen tap tt Apps gt e T Mobile Name ID 2 Choose an on screen option 201 T Mobile TV T Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and Video on Demand m From the Home screen tap ue Apps gt T Mobile TV For more information refer to T Mobile TV on page 173 Talk You can instant message with Google Talk Google Talk allows you to communicate with other people who are also connected with Google Talk on the phone or on the web m From the Home screen tap Apps gt Talk For more information refer to Google Talk on page 14
246. ng the microSD Memory Card Charging the Battery Extending Your Battery Life Initial Device Configuration Switching the Device On or Off Restarting the Device Locking and Unlocking the Device Creating a New Google Account Signing into Your Google Account Retrieving your Google Account Password Confirming the Default Image and Video Storage Location 0000 Creating a Samsung Account Voice Mail 0 c cece eee ees Visual Voicemail 00 cece 1 Task Manager nuun ununa 24 Google Search 0000 eee 25 Section 2 Understanding Your Device 26 Features of Your Device 26 Front View anuanua 27 Back VieW 20 0000 cece eee eee eee 29 Device Display 2222000 29 Status Bar 0 22 0000 02 eeeee 30 Function Keys 00ee ee eeee 36 Home Screen 0000 cece eee 36 Applications 0000000 0 39 Screen Navigation 2 40 Using Gestures 0000000s 41 Menu Navigation 05 42 Customizing the Screens 44 Section 3 Memory Card sssssssscsssees 52 Using the SD Card 04 52 SD card Overview 0005 52 Section 4 Call Functions and GONTAGTS LISTo iisi 56 Displ
247. ngs gt Accessibility Note Initially it might be necessary to download accessibility applications from the Play Store 2 Select the Auto rotate screen field to activate this feature which automatically rotates an available screen 3 Tap Screen timeout to timeout the accessibility feature after a defined amount of time 4 Tap Lock automatically to lock the screen automatically after a selected amount of time Note The Lock automatically function is only available if your device is already using the screen lock feature 5 Select the Speak passwords field to activate this feature which reads out password information 6 Select Answering ending calls field to activate this feature which uses either the key or the to end any current calls 7 Tap Accessibility shortcut to allow the accessibility shortcut under the device options to be used by pressing and holding the power key 8 Tap TalkBack to activate the feature Note TalkBack when installed and enabled speaks feedback to help blind and low vision users Important TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter except passwords including personal data and credit card numbers It may also log your user interface interactions with the device Changing Your Settings 278 10 11 12 13 14 279 Tap the Font Size field to change the size of the fonts used on the device within menus options etc Choose from Tiny Small Normal Large or Hu
248. nization Email IM Address Notes Nickname Website Internet call Events or Relationship e Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields and categories Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or Tap Cancel to delete the current entry To save a Number from your Keypad 1 2 3 From the Home screen tap iG Phone Enter a phone number using the on screen dialpad Tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact or select the Contact entry from the on screen list or Press E and then tap Add to Contacts gt Create contact or select the Contact entry from the on screen list e If you re updating an existing contact tap the entry from the list and proceed to step 5 Tap a destination type Phone SIM Google or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync depending on where you want to save the new contact information Contacts 94 5 Tap the Name field and enter a name for this contact using the displayed keypad Tap to access additional name entries such as Name prefix First name Middle name Last name and Name suffix 6 Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact Selections are Image Take picture or Tagged picture Note For further details about how to enter characters see Text Input Methods on page 78 Finding a Contact You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names onto either your SIM card your phone s built in memory or an external loc
249. not inserted correctly the device will not detect it and no service will be available If this happens turn off the device remove the card and reinstall the card in the correct orientation Getting Started 10 Battery Removing the Battery Before using your device for the first time install the battery m Grip the battery at the top end 3 and lift it up and out and charge it fully of the battery compartment 4 Important Before removing or replacing the battery make 1 sure the device is switched off To turn the device w off hold down the exam key until the Device options screen displays then tap Power off 2 Installing Battery Installing the Battery 1 Slide the battery into the compartment 1 so that the tabs on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone making sure the connectors align 2 Gently press down to secure the battery 2 Removing Battery 11 Installing the microSD Memory Card Your phone supports an optional external microSD or microSDHC memory card for storage of media such as music pictures video and other files The SD card is designed for use with this mobile phone and other devices Important Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the phone s contact pins Note microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB microSDHC memory card types can range from 4GB to up to 32GB Note This device supports up to a 32GB microSDHC memory car
250. not linked cell phones with any health problems Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency RF energy Over the past 15 years scientists have conducted hundreds of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy emitted by cell phones While some researchers have reported biological changes associated 283 with RF energy these studies have failed to be replicated The majority of studies published have failed to show an association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell phone and health problems The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the microwave frequency range They also emit RF at substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand by mode Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects by heating tissue exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic energy Very high levels of electromagnetic energy such as is found in X rays and gamma rays can ionize biological tissues lonization is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in atoms and molecules It can permanently damage biological tissues including DNA the genetic material The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy including both radio waves and microwaves are not great enoug
251. ns 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Unknown sources to active this feature Note If you are notified that you can not download a Play Store application because it comes from an Unknown source enabling this option corrects this issue Credential Storage This option allows certain applications to access secure certificates and other credentials Certificates and credentials can be installed to the SD card and password protected 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Trusted credentials to display only trusted CA certificates A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure credentials 3 Tap Install from device storage to install encrypted certificates from the USB Storage location 4 Tap Clear credentials to clear the device SD card or phone memory of all certificate contents and reset the credentials password Language and Input Settings This setting allows you to configure the language in which to display the menus You can also set on screen keyboard options m From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Language and input Language Settings To set the language that the menus display on the phone 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Language 2 Select a language and region from the list Choose Input Method 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Sett
252. ns with external users For more information refer to Sharing Application Information on page 47 e Hide applications allows you to specify which applications can be hidden from view on the Apps page e Show hidden applications allows you to specify which previously hidden applications are can be made visible again for viewing in this menu Once you have selected the apps tap Done Press to return to the Home screen Screen Navigation Using the touch screen display and the keys you can navigate the features of your device and enter characters The following conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation action in the procedures Navigating Through the Screens The following terms describe the most common hardware and on screen actions e Press and hold Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and buttons to select or activate an item For example press the Navigation key to scroll through a menu Some buttons and keys require you to press and hold them to activate a feature for example you press the Lock key to lock and unlock the phone Touch and hold Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available options or to access a pop up menu For example touch and hold from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options e Tap Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on the virtual QWERTY keyboard For example tap an Application icon to open the application
253. nt contact info allows you to print selected information on a compatible Samsung printer Contacts 100 Contact Entry Options 1 From the Home screen tap Fy 2 Tap an entry to reveal the Contact entry s Overview Screen This screen contains Name contact numbers email and linked contact information 3 Press l to reveal the context menu specific to this entry 4 Tap an available option 101 Contact Overview Screen Joining Contact Information Most people now maintain multiple email accounts social networking logins and other similar account information For example a Facebook account login name might differ from a corporate email account login because they are maintained separately and for different groups of people This device can synchronize with multiple accounts When you synchronize your phone with those accounts each account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list If one of your contacts Amy Smith has a regular email account that you maintain in Gmail but also has a Facebook account under her maiden and married name as well as a Video chat account when you merge those accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of her entries and view the information in one record Joining contact information makes sending messages easy You can select any account email address or information all from one screen versus searching multiple individual screens to locate the desired account
254. nt queue e Save queue stores the current queue e Settings Allows you to view and assign various music settings and view different application specific information Tap to resume playback Tap to pause playback Tap to advance to the next song Touch and hold to scan forward through the current song When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options songs play in random order When disabled as shown songs play in the order they appear in List view Also visible when H is tapped When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options songs play in random order When enabled H HOM amp Help Provides an on screen series of related help topics 4 Tap P gt Add to playlist to add the song to a playlist or songs play in random order Also visible when Tap gt P gt Add to playlist to add the song to H is tapped a playlist 165 Tap to repeat the current song repeat all songs or disable repeat mode Also visible when H is tapped UUN Creating a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap FF Apps gt Ge Play Music 2 Tap an album or song list and play a song 3 Tap gt P adjacent to the song name and select Add to playlist 4 Tap New playlist gt Playlist name field to enter a name for the playlist 5 Tap OK to save the new playlist Adding Songs to Playlists 1 From the Home screen tap EE Apps gt ww Play Music 2 Tap an album or song list and play a song 3 Tap gt P adjacent
255. ntact 97 Pause Dialing 63 Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN 290 Phone Icons 30 Switching on off 18 Phone number Finding 56 Phone Ringtone 250 Set as 168 Phone Vibration 250 Photos Options 149 151 156 Sharing 149 151 156 Play Books 194 Play Music 195 Play Store 195 Quick Access 39 Pointer Speed Configuration 272 Power 35 Power Saving 35 CPU Power 253 Learning About 253 Screen Power 253 Power Saving Mode 252 Predictive Text 88 Activation 89 270 Using 89 270 Prepend Area Code 246 Primary Shortcuts 38 Adding and Deleting 45 Customizing 45 Replacing 46 Q Quick Dialing 57 Quick Messaging 116 R Recently used Applications Accessing 43 Redialing the last number 63 Reducing Exposure Hands Free Kits and Other Accessories 286 Reject Call Rejection Messages 241 Reject Calls Managing 61 Reject List Add To 62 Add to 77 Adding 100 Auto Reject 62 Removing 100 Rejection List Assigning Multiple Numbers 62 Assigning Single Numbers 62 Rejection Messages 241 Reset 274 Reset Device 274 Responsible Listening 298 Restarting Device 18 Restore 273 Restrict Background Data 233 Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile device 303 Ringtone Device 250 Volume 250 S S Voice Require Wake Up 261 Set Wake Up Command 262 Using 65 Samsung Account Creating 21 Merge Contacts 99 330 Samsung Keyboard 85 ABC Mode 87 Changing the Input Type 86 Enabling 85 Settings 88 269 Samsung Keypad Entering Sym
256. nter any requested credentials into the pop up that opens 4 Tap Connect Edit a VPN 1 From the Home screen press I and then tap Settings gt More settings gt VPN Touch and hold the VPN that you want to edit In the pop up that opens select Edit network Make the desired VPN setting changes Tap Save go Pon Changing Your Settings 238 Delete a VPN 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt More settings gt VPN 2 Touch and hold the VPN that you want to delete 3 Tap Delete network within the pop up that opens up Wi Fi Calling You can configure your device to make and receive calls over an active Wi Fi connection Wi Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is limited Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes For more information refer to Wi Fi Calling on page 66 1 Ensure that the Wi Fi connected icon displays on the status bar 2 From the Home screen press Settings gt More settings 3 Tap the Wi Fi Calling field and place a green check mark in the adjacent field This check mark indicates the feature is active B and then tap 239 Wi Fi Calling Settings Important An updated SIM card must be installed within the device prior to using this feature Wi Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching Wi Fi Calling 1 From the Home screen press am
257. nternational study investigating the relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy from communication technologies including cell phones and brain cancer in young people This is an international multi center study involving 14 European and non European countries Additional information about MOBI KIDS can be found at http Awww creal cat programes recerca en_projectes creal view php ID 39 285 Surveillance Epidemiology and End Results SEER Program of the National Cancer Institute The National Cancer Institute NCI actively follows cancer statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of new cases for brain cancer If cell phones play a role in risk for brain cancer rates should go up because heavy cell phone use has been common for quite some time in the U S Between 1987 and 2005 the overall age adjusted incidence of brain cancer did not increase Additional information about SEER can be found at http seer cancer gov Cell Phone Industry Actions Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a number of steps including the following Support needed research on possible biological effects of RF for the type of signal emitted by cell phones Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user and e Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current information on cell phone use and huma
258. number to your Contacts list e Delete thread deletes the currently selected message thread e Register Number as Spam adds the current sender to a spam list ny new texts from this sender are automatically blocked Messages 120 To access additional Bubble options m Touch and hold the message bubble within an active message conversation to display the following options e Delete message deletes the currently selected message bubble from the thread e Copy message text copies the currently selected message bubble from the thread e Lock Unlock message locks or unlocks the currently selected message bubble from being accidentally deleted e Save attachment allows you to save the attached media file Forward allows you to forward the currently selected message bubble to an external recipient e Copy to SIM copies the currently selected message bubble as a single text message within the SIM card View message details displays details for the currently selected message bubble 121 Deleting Messages Deleting a single message thread 1 From the Home screen tap I 2 Touch and hold a message from the Messages list then select Delete thread 3 At the prompt tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit Deleting multiple message threads 1 From the Home screen tap adh 2 Press l and then tap Delete threads 3 Tap each message thread you want to delete A checkmark displays beside each selected message 4 Tap Delete 5 At t
259. o SD card gt OK For more information refer to Export Import on page 110 Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card 1 From the Home screen ta ne Apps gt EH Gallery 2 Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos 3 Remove the back cover and remove the internal microSD card prior to initiating a Kies air update 219 Enabling USB Debugging USB debugging must be enabled before being able to use the Development feature 1 From the Home screen press Settings gt Developer options 2 Tap the USB debugging field to verify the feature is active before connecting your USB cable 3 Using an optional PC data cable connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC Kies Air Kies Air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the same Wi Fi network You can view and share call logs videos photos music bookmarks ringtones and even send SMS messages from your PC amp and then tap Tip Before beginning it is recommended that you update the Java application running on your machine 1 Sign onto the same Wi Fi network from your phone and from your PC 5 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More settings Kies via Wi Fi From the Kies air home screen tap Scan devices If prompted select a network Choose from either Wi Fi or Portable Wi Fi hotspot Write down the on screen URL address Important Both y
260. o turn Bluetooth on 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the right to turn it on ON The slider color indicates the activation status When active displays in the Status area To turn Bluetooth off 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the left to turn it off KOAM Bluetooth Status Indicators The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status at a glance Displays when Bluetooth is active Displays when Bluetooth is connected paired and rp communicating Bluetooth Settings The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the characteristics of your device s Bluetooth service including Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth communication and description Setting your device s visibility or discoverability for other Bluetooth devices Displaying your device s Bluetooth address Connections 214 To access the Bluetooth Settings menu 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Bluetooth 2 Verify Bluetooth is active indicated by Ho Press l and tap the Rename device Visibility timeout and Received files fields to set the options To change your Bluetooth name Verify Bluetooth is active From the Bluetooth settings page tap Rename device Enter a new name Tap OK to complete the
261. ociated with a physical or on screen button on most WAPs allows you to pair your device and WAP without the need for entering a passcode This process is similar to Wi Fi Direct pairing In this case once the WPS feature is active on your WAP your device can then detect it and then immediately pair to it Note WPS capable routers appear in the Wi Fi list of available devices with the term WPS available below their name To pair your device using WPS 1 Follow the WPS activation instructions specific to your Wireless Access Point From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi Press l then tap WPS push button Once the connection is complete confirm the external router now appears in the Wi Fi list as connected WPS PIN Entry If a WPS Push Button does not work there is an alternative WPS connection method where you would use a device generated PIN number to establish the connection This number is then entered into your WAP s WPS client PIN field to complete the connection To pair your device using WPS PIN 1 From the Home screen press Settings gt Wi Fi 2 Press then tap WPS PIN entry 3 Write down the generate PIN number and enter it into your Wi Fi Router s client PIN field 4 Once the connection is complete confirm the external router now appears in the Wi Fi list as connected l and then tap Wi Fi Direct Setup and Settings You can configure your device to connect directly wi
262. om of the screen e Archive Ea archives the selected Email e Delete deletes the currently selected Email e Labels G assigns a label to the current Email e Mark as Unread x tags the current message as unread and returns you to the Google Mail Inbox Newer swiping to the right displays newer Emails Older swiping to the left displays older Emails Press to select one of the following additional options e Mark important assigns the current email an important status e Mute mutes the conversation e Report spam reports the Email message as spam e Report phishing reports the Email message as a phising email attempt e Settings allows you to configure the General or Notification settings Messages 140 Send feedback sends feedback to Google e Help launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help information Creating an Additional Gmail Account 1 From the Home screen tap ne gt wt Gmail 2 Press and then tap Settings gt ADD ACCOUNT and follow the same steps as referenced in the previous section For more information refer to Signing into Google Mail on page 139 141 Google Talk Google Talk is a free Windows and web based application for instant messaging offered by Google Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts Note Before using this application y
263. om the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Set up SIM card lock 3 Tap Lock SIM card enter your SIM PIN code then tap OK Note You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN code To change an existing SIM Card PIN Tap Change SIM PIN Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK Re type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK POR gt Changing Your Settings 264 Password Settings When you create a phone password you can also configure the phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an asterisk 1 From the Home screen press El and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Make passwords visible to activate this feature Device Administration Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC This would be beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or stolen The phone could be deactivated or restricted through administration from a remote location 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Device administrators to begin configuring this setting 3 Select an administrator device and follow the prompts 265 Unknown Sources Before you can download a web application you must enable the Unknown sources feature enables downloading Developers can use this option to install non Play Store applicatio
264. on screen Use the on screen keypad to enter the country code area code and phone number If you make a mistake tap J once to delete a single digit Touch and hold to delete all digits Tap EaI Call Functions and Contacts List 62 Pause Dialing You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with automated systems such as voicemail or financial phone numbers 2 Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after a two second pause This is indicated in the number string as a comma Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping Yes This is indicated in the number string as a semicolon 1 From the Home screen tap and use the on screen keypad to enter the phone number 2 Press and then tap Add 2 sec pause This feature adds an automatic two second pause 3 Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be dialed automatically after the second pause Tip You can create pauses longer than two seconds by entering multiple 2 sec pauses 4 Tap i 63 Wait Dialing Inserting a Wait into your dialing sequence means that the phone waits until it hears a dial tone before proceeding with the next sequence of numbers 1 From the Home screen tap K and use the on screen keypad to enter the phone number 2 Press and then tap Add wait This feature causes the phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set of entered digits 3 Tap 4 Once prompt
265. ones e Ringtones and keypad tones allows you to manage your Device ringtone Device vibration Vibrate when ringing and Keytones settings e Call alert allows you to assign call alert tones and activate call alerts and vibration Call vibrations vibrates the phone when the called party answers Call status tones assigns sounds settings during the call Choose from Call connect tone Minute minder and Call end tone Alerts on call selects whether alarm and message notification is tumed off during a call e Answering ending calls allows you to manage the settings for answering and ending calls The home key answers calls allows you to press the Home key to answer the phone The power key ends calls allows you to press the power key to end the current call e Tum off screen during calls allows you to force the screen to tum off during an active call e Call accessories allows you to assign headset settings during incoming calls Automatic answering configures the device to automatically answer and incoming call when a headset is detecter Automatic answering timer configures the time delay before the device automatically accepts the incoming call Outgoing call conditions configures the Bluetooth headset settings for outgoing calls Options include Even when device lockes or Only when device unlocked a e Extra volume on calls provides an on screen volume button that allows you to
266. only when the device detects it is connected to a power supply This reduced the drain on your device s battery e Never increase data usage shuts off the current Wi Fi connection during sleep and diverts any current data usage to the cellular network connection Finding your WI Fi Address Information 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi Press E and then tap Advanced Locate the MAC Address and IP Address information at the bottom of the screen e MAC address view your device s MAC address required when connecting to some secured networks not configurable e IP address view your device s IP address Changing Your Settings 228 Manually Adding a Wi Fi Network 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Wi Fi gt Add Wi Fi network Enter the Network SSID the name of your Wireless Access Point Tap the Security field and select a security option This must match the current security setting on your target WAP Enter your WAP s password if the WAP is secure Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the target WAP Note An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN Its purpose is to stop other wireless equipment from accessing your LAN whether accidentally or intentionally To communicate wireless devices must be configured with the same SSID 229 WPS Push Button The WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup feature sometimes ass
267. option allows you to show user defined information on the Lock screen 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Lock screen gt Owner information 2 Tap the Show owner info on lock screen checkbox to create a checkmark if you want your owner information displayed 3 Enter text that you would like displayed on your Lock screen 4 Press 5 twice to save the new text and return to the previous screen Security The Security settings allow you to determine the security level for your device Encrypt Device When enabled this feature requires a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your phone each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD card each time it is connected 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Security 2 Tap Encrypt device For more information read the displayed help screen 3 Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption on SD card data that requires a password be entered each time the microSD card is connected Tip Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent Encryption may take an hour or more Setting up SIM Card Lock Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code When enabled your phone will ask for a PIN number each time you use the phone Using this option you can also change your SIM PIN number 1 Fr
268. or more information refer to Notification Bar on page 35 or From the Home screen tap mad then tap the new message to view its contents The selected message displays on the screen 2 Tap to play a multimedia message e To pause playback of the multimedia message tap 3 Ina single motion touch and scroll up or down the page to scroll through the message if additional pages were added Message Threads Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped into message threads Threaded messages allow you to see all the messages exchanged similar to a chat program and displays a contact on the screen Message threads are listed in the order in which they were received with the latest message displayed at the top To reply to a text message 1 From the Home screen tap pad 2 While the message is Reply Bubble Current Recipient My Text Text Message Thread open tap the Enter message field and then type your reply message Compose your reply Your texts are colored Blue and your caller s replies are Yellow Tap EA Send to deliver your reply or Press and then select one of the available message options page 116 To access message thread options From the main Messaging screen touch and hold the message to display the following options e View contact displays the Contact s Overview page e Add to contact begins the process of adding the new
269. ost common methods for securing your connection to the HotSpot are to a security method WPA2 PSK and to Hide your phone s SSID name 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Tethering and Mobile HotSpot 2 Tap the Mobile HotSpot field and then select Configure 3 Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK 4 With security enabled delete the previous password and enter a new one into the Password field Important The more complex the password the harder it will be for intruders to break your security It is recommended that you not use names birthdays or other personal information 5 Tap Save to store the new settings Connections 226 Section 11 Changing Your Settings This section explains the sound and phone settings for your device It includes such settings as display security memory and any extra settings associated with your device Accessing Settings m From the Home screen tap Apps gt O Settings Press gt l and then tap Settings The Settings screen displays Wi Fi Settings This section describes the Wi Fi settings For more information refer to Wi Fi on page 221 227 Activating Wi Fi 1 From the Home screen press amp and then tap Settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on ON The device scans for available in range wireless networks and displays them under Wi Fi networks on the same
270. oth devices with which to pair For more information refer to Bluetooth on page 214 Turning Bluetooth On and Off To turn Bluetooth on 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings 2 In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the right to turn iton BO The slider color indicates the activation status When active displays in the Status area To turn Bluetooth off 1 From the Home screen press amp and then tap Settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider to the left to turn it off Note Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use Activating the Device Name 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Bluetooth 2 Verify Bluetooth is active indicated by ION 3 Press and tap the Rename device The assigned device name displays 4 Tap al to erase the current device name and enter a new name for this device using the keyboard 5 Tap OK to confirm your setting Activating Visibility 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Bluetooth 2 Verify your Bluetooth is active 3 From the top of the Bluetooth settings page toggle the state of the visibility check mark Activating this feature enabled your device visible allows other devices to pair and communicate Scanning for Devices This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you can pair with them 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Bl
271. otification preview allows you to play a sample emergency alert tone Tap Stop to cancel the playback Messages 124 Signature settings e Add signature when enabled this feature allows you to create a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages e Signature text allows you to enter a desired signature for your message Spam message settings e Spam settings when enabled allows you to configure available spam settings such as Register number as spam allows you to manually enter and assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source Register phrase as spam allows you to assign a specific text phrase as belonging to a spam message Ex Dear friend Block unknown senders when active automatically blocks incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers 125 Emergency Alert Configuration This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System CMAS which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting Network PLAN If your wireless provider has chosen to participate in CMAS PLAN alerts are available while in the provider s coverage area If you travel outside your provider s coverage area wireless emergency alerts may not be available For more information please contact your wireless provider Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive geographically targeted messages Alert messages are provided by the US Department of Homeland S
272. ou must first have an active Gmail account available and be currently logged in 1 From the Home screen tap Eee gt Talk Note If you are not already logged into Google refer to the instructions for signing in on page 139 2 Begin using Google Talk Note The Network confirms your login and processes This could take up to 5 minutes to complete Google Google makes messaging and sharing with your friends a lot easier You can set up Circles of friends visit the Stream to get updates from your Circles use Messenger for fast messaging with everyone in your Circles or use Instant Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your own private album on Google 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 19 2 From the Home screen tap nen gt RA Google 3 Select the account you want to use to sign in to Google or Tap Add account to create another account 4 Follow the on screen instructions to use Google 5 Visit www google com mobile for more information Messenger Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into a simple group conversation When you get a new conversation in Messenger Google sends an update to your phone 1 Sign on to your Google account For more information refer to Creating a New Google Account on page 19 2 From the Home screen tap ee gt Messenger or From the Google app
273. ou to manually enter and assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source Messages 126 5 Tap the Number field to manually enter phone number or Tap 2 to select from either your existing Logs or Contacts or Tap Match criteria and select a parameter that must match for the spam action to take effect Choose from Same as Starts with ex 800 or 888 Ends with or includes 6 Tap Save To register text phrases as spam Some incoming messages might not be associated with phone number but rather an email address In these cases the only way to block those messages would be assign a key used term or phrase to activate the Spam block Ex Dear friend Stock Alert or Act Now 1 From the Home screen tap kad 2 Press l and then tap Settings 3 Locate and activate the Spam settings option 4 Tap Register phrase as spam gt Add new 127 e Register phrase as spam allows you to assign a specific text phrase as belonging to a spam message Ex Dear friend 5 Enter a term or word into the field Note The term is case sensitive Ex Act Now is not the same as act now 6 Tap Save To register unknown numbers as spam Some incoming messages might not be associated with either a phone number or email address These incoming messages contain no information as their info is blocked by the sender 1 From the Home screen tap kad 2 Press l and then tap Settings 3 Locate and acti
274. our phone and your computer must be connected to the same Wireless Access Point WAP From your computer enter the URL in your Web browser If prompted an Access Request prompt is displayed on your device Tap Allow to permit connection between the computer and device On your computer you may be prompted to run a Java plugin for a TransferManagerApplet Click Run Tap the Remember for today checkbox if you will be using Kies air with the same PC later 10 11 12 13 14 From your PC a security warning may be displayed asking if you want to run this application Click Run to continue On your PC the Kies air screen is displayed On your phone the icon appears at the top of your screen Follow the on screen instructions to view and share information between your phone and PC Click a link from the left navigation pane to access one of several device file categories such as Device Name provides an overview of all the main categories e Photos Videos Music e Ringtones Bookmarks Messages Call Log Contacts e File Explorer Language settings To exit the Kies air application tap Stop on your device then close out the Web browser on your computer Connections 220 Wi Fi About Wi Fi Wi Fi short for wireless fidelity is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local Area Networks WLAN Wi Fi communication requires access to an existing and accessible Wireless Access Point W
275. overage experience Wi Fi Calling works anywhere there is a Wi Fi signal available Important An updated SIM card must be installed within the device prior to using this feature Wi Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching Wi Fi Calling Important Wi Fi Calling requires registration of E911 information within your account For more information refer to Activating Wi Fi Calling on page 68 Call Functions and Contacts List 66 Note This feature is active by default If you are in an active Wi Fi call and go out of range of your Wi Fi the call will be dropped Activating Wi Fi 1 2 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings Locate Wi Fi and in a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on ON The slider color indicates the activation status Select a Wi Fi network from the list of available networks Follow the on screen instructions to complete connection A Wi Fi Connected 67 Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP DRN Wi Fi Communication Issue S Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Note To avoid international data roaming fees when using Wi Fi calling when outside the United States the Data Roaming feature on your device must be turned off Note With certain rate plans minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available r
276. oving Music Files 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Music Player 2 Tap the All tab 3 Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on screen context menu 4 Tap Delete gt OK The music file s is deleted 171 Music Hub Samsung Music Hub makes your device a personal music manager It lets you access buy and download millions of music tracks Access top albums top tracks featured albums and new releases as well as search for tracks albums and artist Enjoy music samples before you download them from your device Note You must be currently logged into your Google account before accessing the Music Hub application 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt J Music Hub _ 2 Read the Terms and conditions place a checkmark on the desired fields and then tap Accept to continue or Back to exit The Music Hub Home screen displays 3 Read the Registration information select either Register or No Thanks and follow the on screen instructions 4 Choose from any of the following options MP3s Ringtones CallerTunes Shazam Tuneln Radio Slacker or My Stuff e Additional options appear as buttons along the bottom of the screen Choose from New Releases Most Popular or Special Offers Tap Q Search and use the keyboard to enter a key word or phrase to search for media Tap on the keyboard to search Music Hub Select an item to play a sample add an item to your basket or ad
277. ow tap Set wallpaper gt Home screen 4 Select a Wallpaper type e Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image gallery crop the image and tap Done e Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds once done tap Set wallpaper e Tap Wallpapers scroll through the images tap a wallpaper image then tap Set wallpaper Note Wallpapers supports the following image types JPEG PNG GIF BMP and WBMP To change Wallpapers from Settings Menu 1 From the Home screen press Settings gt Display gt Wallpaper 2 Access an available option Choose from Home screen Lock screen or Home and lock screen and then tap Note The Home and lock screens is an additional option that allows you to change both screens at the same time 3 Select a wallpaper type Gallery Live wallpaper or Wallpapers 4 Choose an image and tap Done or Set wallpaper Understanding Your Device 50 To change the current Lock screen wallpaper 1 Navigate to any screen touch and hold an empty area of the screen and tap Set wallpaper gt Lock screen or From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Display gt Wallpaper gt Lock screen 2 Select a Wallpaper type e Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image gallery crop the image and tap Done e Tap Wallpaper scroll through the images tap a wallpaper image then tap Set wallpaper 51 Section 3 Memory Card
278. own to the bottom of the screen to reveal the Notification screen 2 Tap a Choose input method and select an available input method Entering Text 78 Entering Text Using Swype Swype is the default text input method that allows you to enter a word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter lifting your finger between words SWYPE uses error correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the next word SWYPE also includes a touch predictive text system The on screen keyboard options are different between the Android keyboard and Swype on screen input methods Enabling and Configuring SWYPE If you configure another text input method Samsung keypad you must re enable SWYPE before using the SWYPE keyboard When SWYPE is enabled there can also be normal keyboard functionality 1 From the Home screen press amp and then tap Settings gt Language and input 2 Tap Default gt Swype Note During its initial use you may be prompted by a series of Swype Connect set up screens Follow the initial on screen set up instructions 79 Swype Settings To configure Swype settings 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt adjacent to the Swype field 2 Tap How to Swype to view an on screen manual for Swype 3 Tap Gestures to view an on screen reference page related to Gesture usage 4 Tap Preferences to alter these settings e Vibrate on keypress activates a vi
279. p and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Wi Fi Calling 2 Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for use of the Wi Fi Calling feature Wi Fi Preferred Wi Fi network is preferred over cellular network when making calls Calling requires you to stay in the Wi Fi range e Cellular Network Preferred The cellular network is preferred over a Wi Fi network when making calls Never use Cellular Network Use only Wi Fi for calls Do not use Cellular Network even if available 3 Tap Help from the main Wi Fi Calling Settings page to navigate through either an on screen tutorial or review the top 10 Wi Fi Calling questions Nearby devices This option allows you to share your media files with nearby devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi Fi 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt More settings gt Nearby devices 2 Verify Wi Fi Direct is enabled and you are paired with the device you wish to detect and share content with 3 Tap the File sharing field to turn File sharing ON A green checkmark indicates the feature is active Once active H Nearby devices appears at the top of the screen 4 Atthe Nearby devices prompt tap OK 5 Tap Shared contents then check the media you would like to share Tap OK 6 Tap Device name then use the on screen keyboard to change the name shown to others Tap Save 7 Tap Allowed devices list then select the connected devices you would like to allow 8
280. play the password as you enter it in the associated field e Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually POP3 or IMAP Follow the on screen prompts and enter the information specific to your email provider Tap Next At the Account options screen select the frequency which the device should check for new email on the server and tap Next e Tap the Sync Email field to enable automatic synchronization of email between your device and the remote server e Tap the Notify me when email arrives field to receive new email notifications e Tap the Automatically download attachments when connected to Wi Fi field to assist with faster access to large email attachments when using Wi Fi At the Set up email screen name the account and enter a screen name to identify yourself on this account e The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from other email accounts accessed by your device 7 Tap Done to store the new account Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab You can also view Personal information for this account Receipts if you setup the account to return receipts Travel information and more if available Opening an Email 1 From the Home screen tap an gt Email 2 Tap the account name field upper left to open the complete email account list page e Selecting Combined view allows you to view all the emails for your current accounts managed by the application to
281. ps gt Music Player l 2 Press l gt Settings Multimedia 168 Select one of the following settings e SoundAlive set a type of equalization such as Normal Pop Rock Dance Jazz Classic etc e Play speed set the play speed anywhere between 0 5X and 2 0X using the slider e Music menu this menu allows you to select which categories you want to display Choices are Albums Artists Genres Music square Folders Composers Years Most played Recently played or Recently added Tap each item that you want to display in the Music menu e Lyrics when activated the lyrics of the song are displayed if available Music auto off when activated music will automatically tum off after a set interval Using Playlists Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this device or using a third party application such as Windows Media Player and downloading those files to an SD card inserted into the device Creating a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap i Apps gt Music Player Tap the Playlists tab Press l and then tap Create playlist Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new name for this playlist then tap OK Adding Music to a Playlist 1 From the Home screen tap ie Apps gt Music Player Tap the Playlists tab Tap the playlist name in which to add music Tap Add music This option
282. r a selected video Image viewer options are described in the following section The last video you took will be displayed as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon ae Camcorder button shoots or stops video recording when pressed in Camcorder mode Camera Camcorder Mode allows you to take a photo in various modes Once you change the mode the corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the display Slide the button up for Camera mode or down for Camcorder mode Storage location Connection Status indicates the device is connected to an adapter and the current storage location for videos Phone or Memory card on the device Accessing Videos When you shoot a video the file is saved in the Camera folder You can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in the Camera folder 1 From the Home screen tap ELE Apps gt Ky Gallery 2 Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video playback or Tap a video icon from the main Gallery to display the following video menu context options e Camera fo allows you to access the camera camcorder functions e Share via lt i allows you to share the video via Picasa Google Bluetooth Wi Fi Direct Messaging YouTube Gmail and Email e Slideshow appears in Landscape mode and allows you to see your video in a slideshow e Delete appears in Landscape mode and allows you to delete the current video 3 Press l for additional
283. r more voice recordings Tap the recordings to delete and tap Delete Settings the following settings are available Storage allows you to choose where your recordings will be saved Select between Phone or memory card Recording quality allows you to set the recording quality to High or Normal Limit for MMS allows you to select On or Off If you Limit for MMS by selecting On you will be assured that the recording can be sent in a message Contextual filename allows you to assign a filename based on GPS tag information Default name allows you to choose the name prefix for your recordings For example if your Default name is Voice your recordings would be named Voice 001 Voice 002 Voice 003 etc e End allows you to exit the application or Find a pre recorded file then touch and hold it to get these added options Share via Delete Rename Set as or Details 203 Voice Search Launches the Google Now application that is used for voice to text Internet searching 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Voice Search EE 2 When prompted speak into the built in microphone 3 Use the on screen options to find a matching search term VPN Client This is a full featured VPN Client that provides support for the latest IPSec VPN standards and provides interoperability with support for all major VPN Gateways 1 From the Home screen tap lt lt Apps gt WPN Client m 2 Follow
284. r the front sensors Call Functions and Contacts List 56 Quick Dialing a Number from the Contacts List 1 From the Home screen tap Contacts 2 Locate a contact from the list 3 Ina single motion touch and drag your finger over the number by going to the right This action places a call to the recipient Contact tips Quick Calling Quick Texting 57 Running a Call in the Background If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen you are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the green phone icon within the Status bar This is the best way to stay on your current call and do something else multi task such as access the Contacts list view a recent email locate a picture etc In Call Notification od Soe Ending a Call m Briefly tap key to end the call End call Note To redial a recent number tap iN at the end of the call or locate the number from the Logs list tap the entry and tap Call Ending a Call from the Status Bar Making Emergency Calls 1 From an active call you can launch a separate If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn application or return to the Home screen The current on the phone the Insert SIM card to make calls message Call is kept active in the background displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install 2 Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab and the SIM card then drag the tab to
285. rce licenses To obtain the source code covered under the open source licenses please visit http opensource samsung com Disclaimer of Warranties Exclusion of Liability EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT THE PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT AS IS AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE THE DESIGN CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW RULE SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING T599WMFM_UM_English_MB5_PS_092513_F1 THERETO NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN ADDITION SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY INCLUDING INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS Modification of Software SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE USING CUSTOM OP
286. rd This feature is optimized for use with the on screen QWERTY keyboard e Advanced provides additional features such as Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the first word in each sentence standard English style Auto spacing automatically inserts spaces between words Auto punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence by tapping the space bar twice when using the on screen QWERTY keyboard Character preview provides an automatic preview of the current character selection within the text string This is helpful when multiple characters are available within one key Key tap sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an on screen key Tutorial launches a brief on screen tutorial covering the main concepts related to the Samsung keyboard e Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their original configuration Using Predictive Text Predictive text is a system that has next letter prediction and regional error correction which compensates for users pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards 1 From the Home screen press El and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Fey adjacent to the Samsung keyboard field or From within an active text entry screen touch and hold Input Methods and select Settings then tap E to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen In a single motion touch and slide the P
287. re download has completed Displays when Wi Fi is connected active and communicating with a Wireless Access Point WAP Displays when Wi Fi is active and there is an available open wireless network Displays when Wi Fi Direct is active and configured for a direct connection to another compatible device in the same direct communication mode Displays when Wi Fi Direct is communicating with another compatible device Displays when the USB Tethering mode is active and communicating For more information refer to Mobile HotSpot on page 225 5 onnaa a p Displays when Wi Fi is being used as a Mobile HotSpot feature is active and communicating For more information refer to USB Tethering and Mobile HotSpot on page 237 Displays when the Wi Fi calling feature is active Minutes used while connected to the Wi Fi network count against available rate plan minutes Displays when the Wi Fi calling feature is active and you are using it with within your current active call Displays when there is an error in the use or 911 registration of the Wi Fi Calling feature Displays when you are currently in Emergency calling mode You must exit this mode to resume normal calling function Displays in the notifications window when action is required within the Samsung account application Displays in the notifications window when a new T Mobile account information is available Deap B Displays in the no
288. re removed from the group Editing a Caller Group To edit a Group entry there must be at least one member as part of the selected group 1 2 3 4 From the Home screen tap gt Ey Touch and hold a group entry then select Edit group Make modifications to the Group name Group ringtone or Vibration pattern fields Tap Save Deleting a Caller Group 1 2 3 4 Tap Delete From the Home screen tap gt EI Press E and then tap Delete groups Select either Select all or tap the desired group Sending a Message to a Group 1 From the Home screen tap b 4 gt 2 Groups 2 Tap an existing group and press B and then tap Send message Touch and hold a group entry and select Send message 3 Select the recipients of the new message indicated by a green checkmark If an entry contains multiple phone numbers each must be selected individually 4 Tap Done 5 Type your message and tap EA Send Contacts 112 The Favorites Tab The Favorites tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been designated as favorite contacts For more information refer to Logs Tab on page 75 1 From the Home screen tap Fy 2 Tap Favorites tab Adding a contact to your favorites list 1 From within the Favorites tab press l and select Add to Favorites 2 Place a check mark alongside those current Contacts entries you wish to assign as favorites 3 Tap Done to complete the process 113
289. re the page using Gmail or as a message e Find on page allows you to search in the current page e Desktop view allows you to assign the browser to display the current page in the desktop view to closely mimic the display as it would appear on a Desktop computer e Save for offline reading allows you to store the current page in memory so that it can be read later even if you loose your Internet connection e Brightness allows you to assign a brightness level specifically for the browser window This is independent of the brightness assigned within the device s Settings menu e Downloads displays the download history e Print provides print access on compatible Samsung printers e Settings allows you to change the way you view your web pages by changing these options See Browser Settings on page 211 Entering a URL You can access a website quickly by entering the URL Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone To enter a URL and go to a particular website m From the homepage tap the URL field at the top of the screen enter the URL and tap Ke Note This is not the same application as the Google Search Widget The web2go screen can not be accessed via a Wi Fi connection Search the Internet To perform an Internet search using keywords 1 From within the Google search application tap the Google search field enter the keyword s to search using the on screen keypad 2 Tap from the list of se
290. redefined rejection message or tap Create new 2 second delay within a number string the phone continues message to create a new custom outgoing response dialing after 2 seconds without any additional keys being Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer pressed S If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string the the entry s name is displayed You may also see the caller s phone waits for your input A wait requires that any phone number if available consecutive numbers be manually sent by tapping Yes e Call settings to provide you access to the Call settings screen Call Functions and Contacts List 60 Touch and drag upward to reject with a message Touch and slide in any direction to answer the Touch and slide call in any direction to reject the call Managing Reject Calls This feature allows you to categorize both known and unknown callers as rejected contacts These Contacts are then added to you Rejection list which can be managed for individual entries from within the Contacts list or as a whole from the Call rejection screen 1 From the Home screen tap A i 2 Press B and then tap Call settings gt Call rejection 61 In a single motion touch and slide the Auto reject mode slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status of the Auto reject mode e OFF disables the automatic rejection
291. redictive text slider to the right to turn iton BEO Tap the Predictive text field and configure any of the following advanced options e Personalized data activate this feature to use the personal language data that you have entered and selected to make your text entry prediction results better By enabling this feature you can choose from the following personalization features e Learn from Gmail allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account and add used text to your personal dictionary e Learn from Facebook allows you to log into your current Facebook account and add used text to your personal dictionary e Learn from Twitter allows you to sign into your existing Twitter account and add used text to your personal dictionary e Learn from Messaging allows your device to lear your messaging style by using your Messaging information e Learn from Contacts updates predictive style by learning your Contacts style e Clear personalized data removes all personalized data entered by the user Press a to return to the previous screen Using the Google Voice Typing This feature uses Google voice recognition to convert your spoken words into on screen text You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice typing feature You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice typing feature 1 From the keyboard touch the top of the screen and drag it down to display your notification panel Tap ES Choo
292. rrent cycle or define your own by selecting Change cycle Press l and then select from the available on screen options e Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider s partner networks and access data services when you are out of your service providers area of coverage e Restrict background data prevents background data usage This can help prevent over usage of your data minutes e Auto sync data allows the device to automatically sync information and updates with your various services Show Wi Fi usage activates an additional Wi Fi tab that shows you your Wi Fi data usage e Mobile hotspots allows you to select available Wi Fi networks that can service as mobile hotspots Place a checkmark on those entries you wish to use More Settings This tab displays additional wireless and network information m From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt More settings Using Airplane mode This mode allows you to use many of your device s features such as Camera Games and more when you are in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited Important When your device is in Airplane mode it cannot send or receive any calls or access online information or applications 1 From the Home screen press Settings gt More settings l and then tap 2 Tap Airplane mode A check mark displayed next to the feature indicates Airplane mode is active The
293. rst need to deactivate those features before you can make an emergency call Consult your User Manual and your local cellular service provider When making an emergency call remember to give all the necessary information as accurately as possible Remember that your mobile device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident do not cut off the call until given permission to do SO Care and Maintenance Your mobile device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care The suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many years Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from Liquids of any kind Keep the mobile device dry Precipitation humidity and liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic 297 circuits If the mobile device does get wet do not accelerate drying with the use of an oven microwave or dryer because this may damage the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand Doing so may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device Extreme heat or cold Avoid temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 45 C 113 F Microwaves Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven Doing so may cause a fire or explosion Dust and dirt Do not expose your mobile device to dust dirt or sand Cleaning solutions Do not use harsh
294. rtant Points out important information about the current feature that could affect performance Warning Brings to your attention important information to prevent loss of data or functionality or even prevent damage to your phone Text Conventions This manual provides condensed information about how to use your phone To make this possible the following text conventions are used to represent often used steps gt Arrows are used to represent the sequence of selecting successive options in longer or repetitive procedures Example From the Home screen press Menu gt Settings gt Bluetooth Battery Cover The battery SIM card and SD card are installed under the battery cover Important Before removing or replacing the battery cover make sure the device is switched off To turn the phone off hold down the key until the Device options screen displays then tap Power off Caution Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively during installation or removal Doing so may damage the cover To remove the battery cover 1 Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch 2 Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly pop the cover off the device similar to a soda can Getting Started 8 Release Latch To replace the battery cover m Position the battery cover over the battery compartment and press down until you hear a click SIM Card Overview Important Before remov
295. rver as the main source for all emails Server has priority or assign the phone to be the main source and update the server accordingly Device has priority e Auto resend times enables the phone to resend an outgoing email a specified number of times if delivery fails The default is 3 auto resends e Email notifications enables the phone to display a status bar icon when new email messages have been received e Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone when a new or upcoming event is pending e Vibrate assigns a vibration when a new or upcoming event is pending Exchange server settings provides access to the Domain user name Password and Exchange server settings Messages 138 3 Sync Email synchronizes emails between your device and the remote exchange server Sync Contacts synchronizes the contacts between your device and the remote exchange server Sync Calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries between your device and the remote exchange server Sync Task synchronizes your exchange tasks entries between your device and the remote exchange server Press 5S to return to the previous page Using Google Mail Google Mail Gmail is Google s web based email When you first setup the phone Gmail is configured Depending on the synchronization settings Gmail is automatically synchronized with your Gmail account Signing into Google Mail 1 From the Home screen tap tet gt m Gmail Note Yo
296. rward when busy forwards all your calls to voicemail when your phone is busy e Forward when unanswered automatically forwards to your voicemail number when the phone is not answered and otherwise allows you to enter a voicemail number e Forward when unreachable automatically forwards to your voicemail number when the phone is not in service or is turned off Changing Your Settings 244 TTY Mode ATTY also known as a TDD or Text Telephone is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf hard of hearing or who have speech or language disabilities to communicate by telephone Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is compatible with digital cell phones Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that plugs into your phone s headset jack If this cable was not provided with your TTY device contact your TTY device manufacturer to purchase the connector cable 1 From the Home screen tap Phone 2 Press l and then tap Call settings TTY mode 3 Tap TTY Full TTY HCO or TTY VCO to activate the feature or TTY Off to deactivate the feature Off is the default setting 245 HAC Mode This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid Compatibility for this device 1 From the Home screen tap u Phone 2 Press l and then tap Call settings 3 Tap the Hearing aids field to activate the feature green
297. s exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees are 5 000 00 or less Small Claim the arbitrator may if you prevail award your reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs as part of any award but may not grant Samsung its attorney fees expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad faith In a Small Claim case you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total administrative facility and arbitrator fees or 50 00 of such fees whichever is less and Samsung shall pay the remainder of such fees Administrative facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims 317 exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees exceed 5 000 00 Large Claim shall be determined according to AAA tules In a Large Claim case the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party or apportion among the parties reasonable attorney fees expert witness fees and costs Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator s award in any court of competent jurisdiction This arbitration provision also applies to claims against Samsung s employees representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from the licensing or use of the Software You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer purchaser s purchase of this device To opt out you must send notice by e
298. s 212 History 211 Set Home Page 211 Web applications enable downloading 218 Widget Adding Widgets 38 Widgets Adding and Removing 48 Moving to a Different Screen 49 Settings 200 Stopwatch 181 Wi Fi About 221 Activating 67 221 227 Advanced settings 223 Calling 66 Connecting to 221 Deactivating 223 Direct Connection 230 During Sleep 228 MAC Address 228 Manually Adding Network 229 334 Manually scan for network 223 Y Off 223 Yahoo 213 On 221 223 227 YouTube Settings 227 High Quality 205 Show Usage 233 High Qulaity 173 Status icons 222 Settings 204 Wi Fi Calling 9 Activating 68 239 Connection Preferences 68 239 Icons 69 Launching 69 Settings 68 239 Wi Fi Direct 230 Activate and Connect 231 On 231 World Clock DST Settings 181 WPA2 PSK 225 226 WPS PIN Pairing 230 WPS Push Button Connect 229 Pairing 229 335
299. s 250 Audible System Tone Settings These options are used when you use the dialing pad make a screen selection lock your screen or tap the screen Each time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone sounds 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings gt Sound 2 Tap Dialing keypad tone to activate a tone when you use on screen keys A check mark displayed next to these features indicates active status 3 Tap Touch sounds to activate a tone when you touch the screen A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates active status 4 Tap Screen lock sound to activate a tone when you use the Lock screen A check mark displayed next to this feature indicates active status 251 Display Settings In this menu you can change various settings for the display such as the font orientation pop up notifications puzzle lock feature animation brightness screen timeout and power saving mode Adjusting the Screen Display 1 From the Home screen press amp and then tap Settings gt Display 2 Configure the following screen display settings Wallpaper allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home screen Lock screen or both Page buddy allows context related pages to be created on the Home screen You can select Earphones page Docking page and Roaming page Tap Page buddy help for more information e Brightness adjusts the on screen brightness level For more information refer to Adjusting Scre
300. s on the face of your subject Once the camera detects the person s smile it takes the picture e Cartoon gives your photo a cartoon look Multimedia 146 147 Effects allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the photo Options include No effect Black and white Sepia and Negative Settings Edit shortcuts allows you to set shortcut icons for the settings that you use the most GPS tag allows you to turn GPS On or Off also known as Geotagging The location of where the picture is taken is attached to the picture Only available in Camera mode Self portrait allows you to set the front camera so you can take pictures of yourself or video chat Flash allows you to set the flash options to Off On or Auto flash Shooting mode allows you to set the shooting mode For more information see Shooting mode description Effects allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the photo Options include No effect Black and white Sepia and Negative Settings continued Scene mode allows you to set the Scene to help take the best pictures possible Options include None Portrait Landscape Sports Party Indoor Beach Snow Sunset Dawn Autumn color Text Candlelight Firework Backlight and Night Helpful tips are shown for each scene mode at the bottom of the display screen Exposure value allows you to adjust the brightness level by moving the slider Focus mode a
301. s to form a word Ifyou make a mistake tap Rea to erase a single character Touch and hold to erase an entire word 4 Tap EA Send to deliver the message 83 All lowercase Displays when the next character is entered in lowercase Pressing this while in 123SYM mode reveals additional numeric symbols keys Initial Uppercase Displays when the first character of each word is entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters are lowercase All Uppercase Displays when all characters will be entered as uppercase characters By default the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the following letters are lower case After a word is entered and you lift your finger the cursor automatically adds a space after the word Note If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry an on screen popup appears to provide additional word choices Entering Numbers and Symbols in SWYPE By using the on screen keyboard in portrait mode some symbols are not available such as Emoticons or Smileys In SYM mode using Swype you can only enter symbols and numbers from the on screen keyboard Once in SYM mode the text mode key shows A 1 From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard 2 Tap ee to configure the keyboard for SYM mode Once in this mode the text input type shows ee 3 Tap the on screen key for the number or symbol you want to enter 4
302. s you to restrict outgoing calls to a limited set of phone numbers Enabling FDN 1 From the Home screen tap K Phone 2 Press and then tap Call settings gt Additional settings gt Fixed Dialing Numbers 3 Tap Enable FDN 4 Atthe prompt enter your PIN2 code and tap OK Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock Contact customer service for assistance Changing Your Settings 246 Changing the PIN2 Code 1 2 eo Pw Important Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code If your SIM card 247 From the Home screen tap Phone Press and then tap Call settings gt Additional settings gt Fixed Dialing Numbers Tap Change PIN2 At the prompt enter your old PIN2 code At the prompt enter a new PIN2 code Confirm your PIN2 code does not this menu does not display The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier Entering the PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock Contact customer service for assistance Managing the FDN List When this feature is enabled you can make calls only to phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card 1 2 From the Home screen tap Phone Press l and then tap Call settings gt Additional settings gt Fixed Dialing Numbers Tap Enable FDN At the prompt enter your PIN2 code and tap OK
303. s you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from where existing contact information is added to your personal dictionary Helps recognize familiar names Tap Updates to update the application if new software is available Swype Text Entry Tips You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video or tutorial on using Swype You can also use the following Swype text entry tips e Create a squiggle like an S shape to create a double letter such as pp in apple Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a selection Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter contractions Double touch on the word you want to change to correct a misspelled word then touch the delete key to erase one character Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype 1 Note After typing an initial uppercase character the key From a screen where you can enter text tap the text input field to reveal the on screen keyboard With Swype as your text entry method select one of the following text mode options e 123 ABC Pe to use Swype with alphanumeric characters from the on screen keyboard e SYM Symbol a to enter numbers and symbols from the on screen keyboard changes to and all letters that follow are in lower case Swype Keyboard Overview e Recipients a field where you can enter the recipients of the current message You can
304. sabled You will only receive notifications of incoming calls from people on your allowed list 1 From the Home screen press El and then tap Settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Blocking mode slider to the right to turn it on E Confirm the Blocking mode active icon appears in the Status bar 3 Tap the Blocking Mode field and place a green checkmark adjacent to those features you would like to enable Choose from Disable incoming calls Disable notifications and Disable alarm and timer 4 Configure a timeframe for these features to be active Remove the checkmark from the Always field to configure the From and To time fields 5 Tap Allowed contacts to assign those contacts that are exempted from these rules Choose from None All contacts Favorites or Custom 249 Sound Settings From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well as configure the display settings m From the Home screen press E and then tap Settings gt Sound The following options display Silent mode via Device Options Screen Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from making noise in a theater for example In Silent Mode the speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of incoming calls or other functions that normally have a defined tone or sound as an alert 1 From the Home screen press and hold Power End until Device options displays 2 Tap Mute from the Device options screen to activate
305. samsung GALAXY EXHIBIT PORTABLE QUAD BAND MOBILE PHONE User Manual Please read this manual before operating your phone and keep it for future reference eoe Intellectual Property All Intellectual Property as defined below owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to the SAMSUNG Phone including but not limited to accessories parts or software relating there to the Phone System is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws state laws and international treaty provisions Intellectual Property includes but is not limited to inventions patentable or unpatentable patents trade secrets copyrights software computer programs and related documentation and other works of authorship You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property Moreover you agree that you will not and will not attempt to modify prepare derivative works of reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers Open Source Software Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License GPL GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL OpenSSL License BSD License and other open sou
306. se either the Up and Down volume keys or spread pinch the screen to zoom in or out 153 7 Tap the Video key to begin shooting video The red light will blink while recording Tap the Stop key to stop the recording and save the video file to your Camera folder or Tap the Pause key D to pause the recording Once the file has been saved tap the image viewer then tap to play your video for review Press ga to return to the viewer Note Zooming is not supported while recording Full HD video Adjust to a lower resolution to regain this functionality Camcorder Options You can change options using your keypad in capture mode The following short cuts are available Self portrait allows you to activate the front facing camera so you can take videos of yourself or video chat Flash allows you to set the flash options to Off or On When you set the flash to On it stays on continually while you are taking a video Recording mode allows you to set the recording mode to Normal which is limited only by available space on the destination location or Limit for MMS which is limited by MMS size restrictions Effects allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects to the video Options include No effect Black and white Sepia and Negative Settings Edit shortcuts allows you to set shortcut icons for the settings that you use the most Self recording allows you to set the front camera
307. se input method gt Google voice typing At the Listening prompt Q Speak now speak clearly and distinctly into the microphone The text is displayed in the message as you are speaking Tap Done when you are finished or Tap Resume to resume recognition Note The feature works best when you break your message down into smaller segments Entering Text 90 Configure Google Voice Typing 1 From the Home screen press I and then tap Settings gt Language and input or From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select ze Choose input method gt Set up input methods 2 Tap Fey adjacent to the Google voice typing field 91 Select a language by tapping Choose input languages area Remove the check mark from the Automatic field This allows you to select additional languages Select the desired languages Activate Block offensive words to block recognition of known offensive words or language A green check mark indicates the feature is active Tap Download offline speech recognition to enable speech recognition via locally stored files so that even if you are not connected to a network you can still use the service Using Google Voice Typing 1 From a screen where you can enter text in a single motion touch and drag the Status bar down to the bottom of the screen then select a Choose input m
308. sing cell phones at all For example The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000 In this report a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects Their recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly precautionary it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists 287 Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various sources can be obtained from the following organizations updated 10 1 2010 FCC RF Safety Program http www fcc gov oet risafety Environmental Protection Agency EPA http www epa gov radtown wireless tech html e Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA http www osha gov SLTC radiofrequencyradiation Note This web address is case sensitive National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH http Awww cdc gov niosh World Health Organization WHO http Awww who int peh emf en e International Commission on Non lonizing Radiation Protection http www icnirp de e Health Protection Agency http www hpa org uk Topics Radiation US Food and Drug Administration http www fda gov Radiation EmittingProducts RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures HomeBusinessandEntertainment CellPhones default htm Specific Absorption Rate SAR Certification Information Your wire
309. splays Note Your Media Hub account is managed by the Samsung account application This application manages your user profile information 5 If not already signed in press B and then tap Sign in use the keypad to enter the required information then tap Create new account Follow the on screen instructions Multimedia 158 Using Media Hub 1 From the Home screen tap aan Apps gt Media Hub 2 At the Media Hub screen scroll through What s New e What s New shows recently added media that is available for rent or purchase Tap any of the following tabs and select one of the following Movies displays movies that are available for rent or purchase Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the screen Touch a category and movies of that type display e TV Shows displays TV shows that are available for purchase Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the screen Touch a category and TV shows of that type display e My Media allows you to view all of the media that you have purchased or rented Touch a media entry to view it 3 Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item you would like to purchase or rent 4 Tap tap Buy or Rent 159 5 Choose a payment method and then follow the on screen instructions The media stores to the My Media folder Media Hub Notices Any media item Media Content may be rented or purchased after you create an account in Media Hub
310. ss l and then tap Import Export 3 Tap Export to SD card gt OK For more information refer to Export Import on page 110 Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt E Gallery _ 2 Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos 3 Remove both the back cover and remove the internal microSD card prior to initiating the process Factory Data Reset From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to the factory default settings 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Backup and reset gt Factory data reset 2 Read the on screen reset information 3 Tap Reset device 4 If necessary enter your password and tap Delete all The device resets to the factory default settings automatically and when finished displays the Home screen Collect Diagnostics This feature only collects diagnostic data for troubleshooting use 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Backup and reset gt Collect diagnostics 2 Read the on screen System Manager Application information Note This software collects only diagnostic data from your device so that T Mobile technicians can better troubleshoot issues with your device 3 Choose to enable or disable the feature by placing a check mark in the Allow Diagnostics field 4 Select either More Info to read additional information or Close to close the message screen
311. ss B and then tap Settings gt Lock screen gt Lock screen options Tap Lock screen options and choose from e Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock screen e Information ticker sets the news and stock information ticker to appear across the bottom of the Lock screen Clock allows you to display the digital clock while the Lock screen is active Enabled by default e Dual clock displays a set of dual digital clock on the Lock screen while you are traveling Tap the entry to set your home city This time zone then becomes the time used by one of these on screen clocks Weather displays the current area weather on the Lock screen Tap and set both the temperature units F or C and a refresh time Help text shows help information on the Lock screen e Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to wake up S Voice e Set wake up command designates your S Voice wake up commands Tap Wake up S Voice and follow the on screen prompts to create a new verbal command Note These options vary depending on the selected Lock settings Customizing Your Lock Screen Shortcuts Your device also provides up to 4 application shortcuts that can be used to quickly access an application right from the lock screen Important To use these shortcuts your Screen Lock feature can only be set to either Swipe or None To open a shortcut from the lock screen m Ina single motion swipe your finger o
312. stand that no secondary task should be performed while driving whether it be eating drinking talking to passengers or talking on a mobile phone unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes impaired Samsung is committed to promoting responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand and address distractions Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and their accessories in the areas where you drive Always obey them The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain areas For example only hands free use may be permitted in certain areas Health and Safety Information 290 Before answering calls consider your circumstances Let the call go to voicemail when driving conditions require Remember driving comes first not the call If you consider a call necessary and appropriate follow these tips e Use a hands free device Secure your phone within easy reach Place calls when you are not moving Plan calls when your car will be stationary Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations Let the person with whom you are speaking know tha
313. t size Scale text up and down Zoom amount on double tap and minimum font size via the use of an on screen slider e Inverted rendering Allows you to adjust the way a Web page is displayed to make it easier to view or read Enabling this feature causes a page to rendered in reverse Black becomes white and vice versa On screen white text is displayed as white text on a black background e Contrast Allows you to adjust the on screen contrast Note The Contrast feature is disabled until the Inverted rendering function is active Connections 212 Advanced e Select search engine Allows you to choose a default search engine for your phone Choose from Google Yahoo or Bing e Open in background New pages are launched in a separate page and displayed behind the current one Remove the check mark to disable this function e Enable JavaScript Enables javascript for the current Web page Without this feature some pages may not display properly Remove the check mark to disable this function e Allow multiple tabs per app Provides the ability for different applications to launch separate tabs e Enable plug ins Allows the download of plug ins such as Adobe Flash e Default storage Sets the default storage to either Device or Memory card e Website settings View advanced settings for individual websites e Default zoom Adjusts the zoom feature Set to Far Medium or Close Open pages in overview Displays an overview
314. t you are driving and will suspend the call if necessary Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an automobile Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or near the windshield of an automobile In other states the law may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the automobile Be sure to consult the state and local laws or ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an automobile Failure to comply with these restrictions could result in fines penalties or other damages 291 Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the driver s clear view of the street and traffic Never use wireless data services such as text messaging Web browsing or e mail while operating a vehicle Never watch videos such as a movie or clip or play video games while operating a vehicle For more information go to http www ctia org Battery Use and Safety Important Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries and particularly from the continued use of damaged batteries Do not disassemble crush puncture shred or otherwise attempt to change the form of your battery Do not put a high degree of pressure on the battery This can cause leakage or an internal short circuit resulting in overheating Do not let
315. tallic object coin key jewelry clip or pen causes a direct connection between the and terminals of the battery metal strips on the battery for example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag Short circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the object causing the short circuiting Important Use only Samsung approved batteries and recharge your battery only with Samsung approved chargers which are specifically designed for your phone WARNING Use of a non Samsung approved battery or charger may present a risk of fire explosion leakage or other hazard Samsung s warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused by nonSamsung approved batteries and or chargers Health and Safety Information 292 Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers Recycling programs for your mobile device batteries and Some websites and second hand dealers not associated with accessories may not be available in your area reputable manufacturers and carriers might be selling We ve made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers mobile device by working with respected take back Consumers should purchase manufacturer or companies in every state in the country carrier recommended products and accessories If unsure about Drop It Off whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible contact You can drop off your Samsung branded mobile device the manufac
316. ted for dialing Sending a Namecard ANamecard contains contact information and can be sent to recipients as a Virtual Business Card V card attachment using Bluetooth Google Mail or as a message 1 From the Home screen tap a 2 Tap a Contact entry 3 Press and then tap Share namecard via and select a delivery method Bluetooth Email Exchange or Internet Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and is delivered when you send the message Note Email appears as an option only after an Internet or Exchange email account has been created Sending All Current Namecards Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time you can send all of your current entries at once 1 From the Home screen tap A 2 Press l and then tap Import Export gt Share namecard via 3 Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all currently displayed Contact entries 4 Tap Done and select a delivery method e Bluetooth to transmit the contacts to another Bluetooth compatible device Email to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing email Exchange or Internet e Gmail to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing Internet based email e Messaging to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing text message e Wi Fi Direct to transmit the entries to another Wi Fi Direct enabled device Contacts 104 Sending a namecard using Bluetooth You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a
317. th other Wi Fi capable devices This is an easy way to transfer data between devices These devices must be enabled for Wi Fi direct communication This connection is direct and not via a HotSpot or WAP PR Displays when Wi Fi Direct is active and configured for a direct connection to another compatible device in the same direct communication mode PS Displays when Wi Fi Direct is active and Q icati aoM communicating Note Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi Fi network connection Changing Your Settings 230 To activate your connection 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Settings 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Wi Fi slider to the right to turn it on The slider color indicates the activation status 3 Tap Wi Fi Direct 4 Tap Scan and select the single device name to begin the connection process to another Wi Fi Direct compatible device or Tap Multi connect gt Scan and select all the device names to begin the connection process to these Wi Fi Direct compatible devices Note The target device must also have Wi Fi Direct service active and running before it can be detected by your device 5 Tap Done The direct connection is then established Confirm appears in the Status bar 231 Bluetooth settings In this menu you can activate Bluetooth view or assign a device name activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can discover it or scan for other available Blueto
318. the device s location services Important The more location determining functions are enabled the more accurate the determination will be of your position Using Wireless Networks Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your location or search for places of interest you must enable the Use wireless networks option 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Location services 2 Tap Use wireless networks allows apps to use data from sources such as Wi Fi and mobile networks to provide a better approximation of your current location Enabling the GPS Satellites 1 From the Home screen press I Settings gt Location services 2 Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite and then tap Enabling the Location and Google Search 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Location services 2 Tap Location and Google search to enable the GPS satellite Tip When using Google Maps you can turn on Location and Google search Enabling this feature allows you to locate places of interest at the street level However this also requires a Clear view of the sky and uses more battery power Changing Your Settings 256 Lock Screen This menu contains features that allows you to configure the device s security parameters Screen Unlock Pattern Overview To secure data and limit phone access set the phone to require a screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device
319. the two calls m Tap Swap The previous In call number turns gray and displays On hold The new active call displays a green background behind the number 71 Turning the Speakerphone on and off While on a call you can use your Speakerphone by following these steps A 1 Tap Speaker off to toggle the speakerphone on 2 Tap jie Speaker on to toggle the speakerphone off Tip When the speaker is turned On the color of the speaker is green When the speaker is turned Off the color of the speaker is gray Muting a Call 1 Tap Mute off to turn mute on so the other caller cannot hear you speaking 2 Tap Mute on to turn mute off and resume your conversation Switching to Bluetooth Headset 1 Pair the target Bluetooth headset prior to your call 2 While ona call switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of speaker by tapping re Headset off 3 At the prompt tap OK to enable Bluetooth if it is not already activated 4 While ona call switch back to the device speaker by tapping el Headset on More In call Options During a call you can save the current caller s information to the Contacts list or create a Message or Memo Viewing the Contacts List During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list 1 Press and then tap Contacts 2 Browse the Contacts list for the information you need 3 Press 5 to return to the active call Creating a Message During a Call During a call you can create a mess
320. there is no reason to believe that hands free kits reduce risks Hands free kits can be used for convenience and comfort They are also required by law in many states if you want to use your phone while driving Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from RF Radiation Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from cell phones there is no reason to believe that accessories which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks Some products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use special phone cases while others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone Health and Safety Information 286 Studies have shown that these products generally do not work as advertised Unlike hands free kits these so called shields may interfere with proper operation of the phone The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate leading to an increase in RF absorption Children and Cell Phones The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of cell phones from RF exposure including children and teenagers The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to children and teenagers as well Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the head and the cell phone Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from u
321. tifications window when there are too many on screen notification icons to display Tap to show more notifications Tap to select a text input method Displays in the notifications window when a songis currently playing within the Music Player Displays in the notifications window when a songis currently playing within the Play Music application Displays when your device s GPS is on and communicating Displays when the external SD card internal microSD has been disconnected unmounted from the phone and is now ready for either removal or formatting Displays when the External SD card is being prepared for mounting to the device This is required for communication with the External SD card Displays when the microSD card has been improperly removed Displays when storage within either the internal location or the external SD card has reached its capacity It is recommended you either move files off or delete them to make additional room Displays when Power saving mode is enabled Displays when the Power saving alert notification has been activated You are then prompted to view your current battery level 8 Displays when TTY device has been inserted P4 For more details on configuring your device s settings see Changing Your Settings on page 227 Understanding Your Device 34 Notification Bar The Notification area indicates new message events data sync status new messages c
322. time data charges and or additional charges may apply in accordance with your service plan Contact your wireless service provider for details Your Location Location based information includes information that can be used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network transmit location based information Additionally if you use applications that require location based information e g driving directions such applications transmit location based information The location based information may be shared with third parties including your wireless service provider applications providers Samsung and other third parties providing services Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls When you make an emergency call the cellular network may activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the emergency responders your approximate location AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area Therefore Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your ability and Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder instructs you Navigation Maps directions and other navigation data including data relating to your current location may contain inaccurate or incomplete data and circumstances can and do change over time In some areas complete information may not be available Therefore you should always visually confirm t
323. tion 1 and bottom right is the last screen Assigning a New Home Screen 1 From the Home screen press B and then tap Edit page 2 Tap Ol The new Home screen then indicates this Al Home screen icon in the upper right 45 Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts The device comes with four Primary shortcuts Phone Contacts Messaging and Applications Home As long as the Application menu is displayed in a Customizable grid you can replace these shortcuts with other applications so you access the shortcuts that are most frequently used To remove a primary shortcut 1 Press to go to the Home screen 2 Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to replace then drag it to an empty space on any available screen The primary shortcuts are now updated to show an empty slot To insert a new primary shortcut 1 2 Press and then tap eee Apps Locate your desired application then touch and hold the on screen icon to position it on a desired screen Locate the screen with the desired shortcut you want to add as the new primary shortcut Touch and hold the shortcut until it detaches from the screen In a single motion touch and hold the new shortcut then drag it to the empty space in the row of primary shortcuts The new primary shortcut will now appear on both the Home and Extended screens Adjusting the Home Screen Mode This application allows you to change the Home screen mode and choose between Basic mode and Eas
324. tion 294 Display Touch Screen Please note the following information when using your mobile device WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY The display on your mobile device is made of glass or acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or if it receives significant impact Do not use if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you WARRANTY DISCLAIMER PROPER USE OF A TOUCH SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE If your mobile device has a touch screen display please note that a touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your finger or a non metallic stylus Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage the tempered glass surface and void the warranty For more information please refer to the Standard Limited Warranty 295 GPS amp AGPS Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning System GPS signal for location based applications A GPS uses satellites controlled by the U S Government that are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan FRP Changes may affect the performance of location based technology on your mobile device Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global Positioning System AGPS which obtains information from the cellular network to improve GPS performance AGPS uses your wireless service provider s network and therefore air
325. tions and Development 204 e Search About Clear search history allows you to clear previous YouTube Help provides answers to most YouTube questions searches from showing up in the YouTube search box Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube Never remember history allows you to force YouTube to never Google Mobile Terms of Service store search history information YouTube Terms of Service SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for Google Mobile Privacy Policy videos containing restricted content This option blocks these YouTube Privacy Policy videos from appearing within your search results Choose from Don t filter Moderate or Strict blocking e Preloading Preload subscriptions allows you to preload or go get videos while on Wi Fi and charging your subscription videos Preload watch later allows you to enable the preload function on selected videos so you can watch them later Read the data usage information and tap OK to accept the terms Open source licensing App version displays the software version for the current YouTube application To watch a high quality video m Press El and then tap Settings gt General gt High quality on mobile Note Preloading YouTube videos will use some of your device s storage space and may result in additional charges if your Wi Fi plan is not unlimited 205 Section 10 Connections Your pho
326. tions of this manual generally follow the features of your phone A robust index for features begins on page 319 Also included is important safety information that you should know before using your phone This information is available near the back of the guide beginning on page 283 This manual provides navigation instructions according to the default display settings If you select other settings navigation may be different Unless otherwise specified all instructions in this manual assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the available keys Note Instructions in this manual are based on default settings and may vary from your device depending on the software version on your device and any changes to the device s Settings Unless stated otherwise instructions in this User Manual start with the device unlocked at the Home screen All screen images in this manual are simulated Actual displays may vary depending on the software version of your device and any changes to the device s Settings Special Text Throughout this manual you ll find text that is set apart from the rest These are intended to point out important information share quick methods for activating features to define terms and more The definitions for these methods are as follows e Notes Presents alternative options for the current feature menu or sub menu Tips Provides quick or innovative methods or useful shortcuts Impo
327. to copy one or more pictures to a display them different folder Rotate left allows you to rotate the view of the current image in 2 The following options are available at the top of the counterclockwise direction oo Rotate right allows you to rotate the view of the current image e Camera allows you to access the camera camcorder ina clockwise direction functions Crop provides an on screen box that allows you to crop the e Share via lt i allows you to share the picture via Flipboard current picture Tap Save to update the image with the new Picasa Google Bluetooth Wi Fi Direct Messaging Gmail dimensions or tap Discard to ignore any changes and Email 149 Edit launches the Photo Editor application The Photo Editor application can be downloaded from the Play Store Set as allows you to assign the current image as a Contact photo Home screen Lock screen or Home and lock screens Buddy photo share allows you to share the current image with active ChatON buddies Print allows you to print the current image on a compatible Samsung printer Rename allows you to rename the current file Scan for nearby devices scans for nearby DLNA compliant devices that can receive or display the current image Details files details such as Title Time Width Height Orientation File Size and Path Video viewing options Note If no control icons are displayed on the screen
328. to destroy every activity as soon as the application is closed Tap Limit background processes to set the number of processes that can run in the background Options are Standard limit No background processes and 1 to 4 processes at most Tap Show all ANRs to display a prompt when applications running in the background are not responding B and then tap About Device This menu contains legal information system tutorial information and other phone information such as the model number firmware version baseband version kernel version and software build number To access phone information m From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt About device The following information displays e Software update allows you to connect to the network and upload any new phone software directly to your device The device automatically updates with the latest available software when you access this option e Status displays the battery status the level of the battery percentage the Network connection Signal strength Mobile network type Service state Roaming status Mobile network state My phone number IMEI number IMEISV IP address Wi Fi MAC address Bluetooth address Serial number Up time and Device status e Legal information This option displays information about Open source licenses as well as Google legal information This information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal information and fac
329. tor When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time remain 15 charge a warning tone sounds and the Battery low message repeats at regular intervals on the display In this condition your device conserves its remaining battery power by dimming the backlight When the battery level becomes too low the device automatically turns off The on screen battery charge is represented by default as a colored battery icon You can also choose to display a percentage value Having a percentage value on screen can provide a better idea of the remaining charge on the battery 15 m Press gt l and then tap Settings gt Display gt Display battery percentage For more information refer to Display Settings on page 251 Extending Your Battery Life Active applications light levels Bluetooth usage and GPS functionality all act to drain your battery The following is a list of helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power Reduce your backlight on time Turn Bluetooth off when not in use Turn Wi Fi off when not in use Deactivate the GPS when not needed Most applications using this function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current location each query drains your battery Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging your device Repeating this process of a complete discharge and recharge can over time reduce the storage capacity of any
330. ts to or view your service numbers or send contact information Options include Only contacts with phones List by Display contacts by Service numbers and Contact sharing settings Contact Menu Options 1 2 From the Home screen tap Touch and hold an entry to reveal the context menu The following options display e Edit allows you to edit the currently selected Contacts entry e Delete allows you to delete the currently selected Contacts entry e Join contact allows you to link the current contact to another current contact Similar to a see also feature If you can t remember a contact s information linking entries can help you find the person you are looking for e Share contact via message allows you to send the current entry info via text message e Add to Favorites allows you to copy the current Contacts entry to the list within the Favorites tab e Remove from Favorites allows you to remove the current Contacts entry from the Favorites tab e Add to group allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an existing group Add to reject list Remove from reject list allows you to add or remove the current Contacts entry to a list of automatically rejected incoming phone numbers e Share namecard via allows you to send the current Contact entry s information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth Email Exchange or Internet Gmail Messaging or Wi Fi Direct e Pri
331. ts as well as Google Terms of Service Terms of Service for Android powered Phones and much more pertinent information as a reference Read the information and terms then press S to return to the Settings menu Model number displays the device s mode number e Android version displays the firmware version loaded on this device e Baseband version displays the baseband version loaded on this device e Kernel version displays the kernel version loaded on this device Build number displays the software build number Note Firmware baseband kernel and build numbers are usually used for updates to the handset or support For additional information please contact your T Mobile service representative Changing Your Settings 282 Section 12 Health and Safety Information This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using your phone The terms mobile device or cell phone are used in this section to refer to your phone Read this information before using your mobile device Exposure to Radio Frequency RF Signals The U S Food and Drug Administration FDA has published information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency RF exposure from wireless phones The FDA publication includes the following information Do cell phones pose a health hazard Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause cancer or other serious health hazards The weight of scientific evidence has
332. ttery power conditions are displayed over roads as color coded lines Each color represents how fast the traffic is moving Opening Maps Satellite Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Satellite images are not real time Google Earth acquires the Q Maps a best imagery available most of which is approximately one to 2 Tap the upper right My location button to find your three years old location on the map with a blinking blue dot Terrain combines a topographical view of the area s terrain 3 Locate the bottom row of the buttons to access with the current map location additional options Transit Lines displays the overlapping transit lines on your e Search allows you to search for a place of interest map e Directions displays navigation directions to a location from a Latitude allows you to see your friend s locations and share starting point your location with them e Local provides access to the places menu where you can My Maps displays a list of your preferred maps quickly locate a business or person find out more information Bicycling displays the overlapping cycling trails on your map about a business see coupons public responses and more Wikipedia displays any Wikipedia markers and info on your page 184 Locate and tap one of the listed places map Restaurants Cafes Bars Attractions user added searches RECOMMENDATIONS or
333. turer of the battery or charger and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Misuse or use of incompatible phones batteries and Samsung Recycling Direct SM locations A list of these locations may be found at charging devices could result in damage to the equipment estes http pages samsung com us recyclingdirect and a possible risk of fire explosion or leakage leading to A eos i usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations serious injuries damages to your phone or other serious isp hazard ne A Samsung branded devices and batteries will be accepted Samsung Mobile Products and at these locations for no fee Recycling Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its batteries at many retail or carrier provided locations customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine where mobile devices and batteries are sold Additional Samsung accessories information regarding specific locations may be found at http www epa gov epawaste partnerships plugin cellphone index htm or at http Awww call2recycle org Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only important for safety it benefits the environment Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly 293 Mail It In UL Certified Travel Charger The Samsung Mobile Take Back Program will provide The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable
334. two second pause or Press l and then tap Add wait This feature causes the phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set of entered digits Tap Add to Contacts gt Update existing 4 Scroll through the available list of existing entries and select the desired target Note This new phone number is then added as a new number to the selected entry 5 Tap the label button to the left of the new phone number and scroll through the list to select a category type 6 Tap Save to store and update the entry Adding a Pause or Wait to an Existing Contact 1 From the Home screen tap 2 2 Tap a contact name from the list and tap G Edit 3 Tap the desired number field and and select Eig Symbol 4 Tap Pause This feature adds an automatic two second pause or Tap Wait This feature causes the phone to require your acceptance before sending the next set of entered digits 5 Enter the additional number 6 Tap Save to store and update the entry Deleting Contacts Important Once Contacts list entries are deleted they cannot be recovered 1 From the Home screen tap A 2 Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select Delete gt OK Contacts 98 Contact List Options 1 2 99 From the Home screen tap J Press B The following options display e Delete allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts Import Export imports or exports contacts to or from the USB storag
335. u must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access features such as Google Mail and Play Store 139 Tap New if you do not have a Google account Tap Existing if you have a Google account The Inbox loads conversations and email Opening Gmail From the Home screen tap ue gt m Gmail 2 Tap an existing email message Refreshing Google Mail m From within the Gmail message list tap 5 Refresh at the bottom of the screen to refresh the screen send and receive new emails and synchronize your email with the Gmail account Other Gmail Options 1 From the main Gmail screen tap G Labels at the bottom of the screen to set up and manage Labels for your Gmail messages From the main Gmail screen tap Q Search at the bottom of the screen to search through your Gmail messages Composing a Gmail Message 1 From the Home screen tap HIE IVI Gmail 2 From the Gmail Inbox tap mm Compose at the bottom of the screen to create a new message 3 Enter the recipients Email address in the To field Tip Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma 4 Press and select Add Cc Bcc to add a carbon or blind copy 5 Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field 6 Tap the Compose Mail field and begin composing your message 7 Once complete tap gt Send Viewing a Gmail Message 1 From the Gmail Inbox tap a message to view the following options located at the bott
336. uctive coupling with hearing aids operating in telecoil mode Hearing devices may also be rated Your hearing aid manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find this rating Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is relatively immune to interference noise Under the current industry standard American National Standards Institute ANSI C63 19 the hearing aid and wireless mobile device rating values are added together to indicate how usable they are together For example if a hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating the sum of the two values equals M5 Under the standard this should provide the hearing aid user with normal use while using the hearing aid with the particular wireless mobile device A sum of 6 or more would indicate excellent performance However these are not guarantees that all users will be satisfied T ratings work similarly 303 The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the American National Standards Institute ANSI C63 19 standard Restricting Children s Access to Your Mobile Device Your mobile device is not a toy Do not allow children to play with it because they could hurt themselves and others damage the mobile device or make calls that increase your mobile device bill Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children FCC Notice and Cautions FCC Notice
337. uetooth 2 From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page tap Scan to search for visible external Bluetooth compatible devices such as headsets devices printers and computers Important Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to confirm and pair with them 3 Enter a PIN to pair with the device if one is required and tap OK Changing Your Settings 232 Data Usage Monitor and mange your device s data usage capabilities Features include activation deactivation or network data usage set mobile data usage for a set period of time and view application data usage m From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Data usage To activate deactivate Mobile data usage 1 From the Home screen press amp and then tap Settings gt Data usage 2 Tap the Mobile data field to activate the feature A green checkmark indicates the feature is active 3 Tap the Mobile data field again to deactivate the feature To set a mobile data limit 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Data usage 2 Place a check mark in the Set mobile data limit field Read the on screen disclaimer info and tap OK 233 Touch and drag the far right ends of the Red or Orange horizontal lines to manually adjust both the Warning and Maximum data limits Touch and drag the bottom grey vertical lines to adjust the time frames Tap the Data usage cycle button and select either the cu
338. vate the Spam settings option 4 Tap Block unknown senders A green checkmark indicates the feature is active e Block unknown senders when active automatically blocks incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers If an incoming message is designated in coming from an unknown sender it is automatically assigned as spam and is now located in your Spam folder Accessing Your Spam Folder Any message assigned as spam is automatically placed with your Spam messages folder 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Press and then tap Spam messages Text Templates This screen displays your available text message reply templates This is a readily accessible list of both default and user defined text snippets that can be used to quickly reply to incoming messages 1 From the Home screen tap radl 2 From the Messaging list press l and then tap Text templates 3 Tap a message to immediately insert it into your current message conversation To create your own text template 1 From the Home screen tap 2 From the Messaging list press l and then tap Text templates 3 Tap Create template 4 Enter a new text string and tap Save Messages 128 Email or Internet Email enables you to review and create email using several email services You can also receive text message alerts when you receive an important email Your phone s Email application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts simultaneously in one con
339. venient location There are currently three main types of email accounts on your phone Gmail Internet based email Gmail Yahoo etc and Microsoft Exchange Corporate email or Outlook To send and receive email messages through an ISP Internet Service Provider account or if you wish to use your device to access your corporate email through a VPN Virtual Private Network you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol This protocol is frequently used in large networks and commercial settings IMAP4 is the current standard POPS Post Office Protocol This protocol is supported by most ISPs Internet service providers and common among consumer applications POPS is the current standard 129 Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync This protocol is frequently used with a large corporate email server system and provides access to email contact and calendar synchronization Creating an Internet Email Account 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Email 2 If you already have other email account setup e Open an existing email account press and then tap Settings gt f Add new account Account name Access available accounts and folders Enter your Email address and Password information Email address your Internet email address Password typically your network access password case sensitive Tap Show password to dis
340. ver the on screen icon and towards the top of your device Your device will unlock and you will be taken immediately to the application To edit these Lock screen shortcuts 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Lock screen gt Lock screen options 2 Ina single motion touch and slide the Shortcuts slider to the right to turn it on 3 Tap the Shortcuts field to activate the menu Tap a shortcut icon you wish to replace 5 From the select application menu tap a replacement application 6 Press 5 to return to the previous screen Using a Visible Pattern When the Make pattern visible option is enabled the device displays the on screen lock grid that is used for unlocking Note This option only appears when a screen lock option is active Changing Your Settings 262 Locking Automatically This option allows you to define the amount of time that must pass before the device can automatically lock on its own Note This option only appears when a screen lock option is active Lock Instantly with Power Key When enabled the screen is automatically locked after pressing the Power Lock key Note This option only appears when a screen lock option is active Vibrate on Screen Tap When enabled you will feel vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern using a PIN or password lock Note This option only appears when a screen lock option is active 263 Owner Information This
341. ver you are your daily journey just got easier 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt Scout 2 If prompted read the on screen terms of use and click Accept to agree to the information Wait for the application to load required first time use files 3 If prompted read the GPS Settings notification tap GPS Settings button and follow the on screen prompts to enable the necessary GPS location feature 4 If prompted select to use either the paid options or use the No thanks use Scout without advanced features option 5 Use the available on screen functions Settings This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your device It includes such settings as display security memory and any extra settings associated with your phone Apps gt m From the Home screen tap tr Settings Press gt l and then tap Settings For more information refer to Changing Your Settings on page 227 Slacker Radio Slacker Radio offers free Internet radio for mobile phones 1 From the Home screen tap t Apps gt amp Slacker Radio B 2 When prompted select an account type Premium Paid or Basic Free or Tap Sign in if you have already created an account 3 Begin selecting the music you want to listen to T Mobile My Account This option provides you online access to account specific information such as your current activity billing information plan services downloads and other i
342. vice numbers listed in your Contact list 1 From the Home screen tap 2 Press and then tap Settings Configure any of the following options e Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those contacts containing phone numbers e List by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted First name or Last name e Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are listed First name ex Steve Smith or Last name first Smith Steve e Service numbers lists the currently available service numbers e Contact sharing settings allows you configure how your Contacts entries are sent individually or as a single file containing all available entries Tap Settings to select a share setting Send all namecards allows you to set your Contact sharing option to all so that your entire Contacts entries are sent as a group and not as multiple single files If all your entries are selected only a single file is sent Note Your destination device must support this feature or no entries will be received by the external device Send individual namecards allows you to set your default to send individual contacts one at a time Even if you select all your entries each is sent individually Contacts 110 Groups This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call group This group can be one of the already present groups Family Friends or Work or a user created group Creating a New Cal
343. x Extended screens Search displays the Google Search box that you can use to search for a key term online Settings provides quick access to the device s settings menu The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing and then tapping Settings Understanding Your Device 38 Applications The Application menu provides quick access to the most frequently used applications Applications display on each of the four panels on the Applications screens Application Screen Menu Settings When on the Apps screen the following menu options are available 1 2 39 Press and then tap ties Apps Press and then select from the following options e Play Store provides quick access to the Play Store e Edit allows you to add a new folder to the Application screen and then drag drop an existing application into it This feature requires the view be set to Customizable view e Create folder allows you to create an application folder where you can better organize and group desired apps Uninstall allows you to uninstall a user downloaded application Only those applications that are not default to the device can be downloaded Tap e to remove the selected app e View type allows you to customize the way the Application menu listing is shown For more information refer to Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts on page 45 e Share apps allows you to share information about selected applicatio
344. xt to the World Clock city listing Stopwatch This feature allows you to capture elapsed time while letting the stopwatch keep running 1 From the Home screen tap Apps gt X Clock gt Stopwatch tab Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter Tap Stop to stop the counter Tap Restart to restart the lap counter You can have multiple lap times 6 Tap Reset to reset the counter 181 Setting a Timer 1 From the Home screen tap lt Apps gt X Clock gt Timer tab 2 Tap the Hours Minutes or Seconds field and use the on screen keypad to enter the hour minute or seconds The timer plays an alarm at the end of the countdown 3 Tap Start to start the timer 4 Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and start over 5 Tap Restart to resume the timer counter Configuring a Desk Clock This feature lets you activate an on screen clock that can be viewed when the device is docked Ta m From the Home screen tap Apps gt X Clock gt Desk clock tab SS Contacts The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your Contacts List is your phone s built in memory m From the Home screen tap Apps gt Contacts _ For more information refer to Contacts List on page 92 Downloads Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current downloaded files Internet and Other 1 From the Ho
345. y mode Basic mode displays screens shortcuts and widgets in their standard view as seen on most Android devices Easy mode makes navigation easier by increasing the size of most application shortcuts providing an entire page with large Contact entries and creating other easy to access and view widgets This mode is intended for first time smartphone users 1 From the Home screen press and then tap Settings gt Home screen mode 2 Tap the pull down dropbox and select one of the following options e Basic mode provides conventional layout for the apps and widgets on your home screens Easy mode provides easier user experience for first time smartphone users on the home screens 3 Tap Apply and give your device a few seconds to update the device with the new look and feel For more information refer to Home Screen Mode on page 248 Understanding Your Device 46 Sharing Application Information The device s Applications menu now comes with a feature that allows you to share information about your selected applications with external users 1 2 3 Note 4 5 47 meee Berria Press and then tap cece Apps Press and then tap Share apps Place a check mark alongside those applications you wish to share information about and tap Done Most shared applications consist of those that have previously been downloaded from the Play Store Select a sharing method Choose from Bluetooth E
346. your current pattern tap Pattern from the Screen unlock settings menu and follow the procedures outlined in Setting an Unlock Pattern on page 258 to create a new pattern To unlock your device using your Google account 1 Tap Forgot pattern located at the bottom of the screen 2 Tap the Username email and Password fields use the on screen keyboard to enter your Google Account credentials and tap Sign in to complete the login process 3 If you have forgotten your Google Account credentials visit the Google website to recover them If you still cannot get your Google Account credentials contact your wireless carrier for additional options Changing Your Settings 260 PIN Lock and Unlock 1 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Lock screen Tap Screen lock gt PIN Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch Continue to confirm the password Confirm the PIN by re entering it and tap OK to confirm Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in order to unlock the phone Password Lock and Unlock 1 261 From the Home screen press El and then tap Settings gt Lock screen Tap Screen lock Tap Password Enter a password using the keypad and tap Continue to confirm the password Confirm the password by re entering it and tap OK to confirm Samsung Unlock Options Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions 1 From the Home screen pre
347. ype dictionary across fields Helps recognize familiar names multiple devices Twitter allows you to sing into your existing Twitter account e Contribute usage data when enabled allows the Nuance from where names and words are added to your personal application to collect usage data for better word predictions dictionary Helps recognize familiar names and words e Cellular data when enabled activates cellular data usage by Gmail allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from the Swype application so it can receive program updates where existing contact information is added to your personal language downloads and other related features via your dictionary Helps recognize familiar names existing data connection 8 Tap Updates to update the application if new software is available Changing Your Settings 268 Samsung Keyboard Settings 1 269 From the Home screen press l and then tap Settings gt Language and input gt Fey adjacent to the Samsung keyboard field From within an active text entry screen touch and hold Input Methods and select Settings then tap from the bottom of the screen to reveal the Samsung keyboard settings screen Set any of the following options e Portrait keyboard types allows you to choose a keyboard configuration Qwerty keyboard default or 3x4 keyboard e Input languages sets the input language Tap a language from the available list The keyboard is updated to t

T-Mobile Samsung Galaxy Exhibit 4GB 4G Grey

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents